ff  . 


,,.  "* ' ''  " 


'  ' '  t 


M 


•J.'J}, 


i -  — 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


littp://www.arcliive.org/details/baseballindividuOOclarricli 


BASEBALL 


*  \    •   •  • 


A   STRAIGHT  OVERHAND  DELIVERY. 

Illustrating  the  proper  position  for  getting  the  full  power  of  the  back  and  arm. 


-BASEBALL 

INDIVIDUAL  PLAY  AND  TEAM  PLAY 
IN  DETAIL 


BY 
W.  J.  CLARKE 

HEAD  COACH  OF  THE  PRINCETON  UNIVERSITY  BASEBALL  TEAM 

AND 

FREDRICK  T.  DAWSON 

GENERAL   ATHLETIC    COACH,    UNION    COLLEGE 


WITH  ILLUSTRATIONS 
AND    DIAGRAMS 


NEW  YORK 

CHARLES  SCRIBNER'S  SONS 

1915 


Copyright,  191 5.  by 
CHARLES  SCRIBNER'S  SONS 


Published  April,  1915 


"6 


5 


^ 


^"^'^    ./  / 


INTRODUCTION 

The  present  position  of  the  game  of  baseball  in 
the  United  States,  the  enthusiasm  with  which  it  is 
played,  and  the  interest  with  which  it  is  watched 
by  the  American  people  have  made  it  very  evi- 
dent that  it  would  be  valuable  both  to  players  and 
spectators  to  have  easily  available  a  book  formu- 
lating what  has  been  found  to  be  the  best  way  of 
playing  the  game.  Although  it  is  a  sport  which 
is  most  widely  followed,  yet  comparatively  few 
players,  and  fewer  spectators,  really  understand 
it  thoroughly.  The  reason  for  this  will  be  appar- 
ent when  one  realizes  that  the  leaders  of  the 
game,  with  a  knowledge  gained  through  years  of 
experience  and  careful  study,  have,  for  the  most 
part,  reserved  this  knowledge  for  those  imme- 
diately under  their  control,  while  the  average 
player  and  spectator  must  be  content  to  play  and 
watch  the  game  as  best  he  can. 

A  brief  review  of  the  development  of  the  game 
will  help  to  bring  out  the  facts  that  have  to  do 
with  the  writing  of  this  book. 

Baseball  originated  here  in  America  in  the  sim- 
ple pastime  of  tossing,  hitting,  and  catching  a 


vi  .  INTRODUCTION 

ball.  At  first  two,  then  three,  boys  played  the 
game.  Gradually  the  number  of  players  was  in- 
creased; an  infield  and  an  outfield  were  formed; 
play  became  more  complicated;  and  rules  were 
drawn  up.  When  the  game  had  assumed  definite 
form,  its  popularity  spread  throughout  the  coun- 
try; for  here  was  a  sport  which  was  good  fun — 
it  including  throwing,  batting,  running,  and  catch- 
ing under  the  most  exciting  of  conditions;  and 
eighteen  men  could  take  part  in  it  at  one  time. 
Year  after  year  the  game  was  played  with  in- 
creasing interest — boys  were  playing  it  in  their 
early  teens,  and  continued  to  do  so  in  manhood. 
In  the  meantime,  after  years  of  pure  fun,  men 
began  to  specialize  in  the  game.  They  studied  it, 
for  they  realized  that,  in  addition  to  purely  nat- 
ural physical  skill,  other  things  were  necessary; 
and  these  were  to  be  acquired  only  through  ob- 
servation and  practice.  Pitchers,  instead  of  being 
contented  to  throw  a  straight  ball,  began  to 
curve  it.  Combination  play — team-work — was 
developed.  Men  took  advantage  of  knowledge 
gained  through  experience  and  began  to  diagnose 
plays  ahead  of  time. 

Certain  principles  were  deduced,  laws  were  dis- 
covered, and  years  of  experience  produced  a  class 
of  experts — men  who  were  skilful  in  physical 
execution   and   keen  in   mental    activity — skilful 


INTRODUCTION  vii 

in  handling  the  ball,  in  running  the  bases,  and  in 
batting;  keen  in  observing  and  putting  into  effect 
the  laws  of  probability. 

And  from  among  these  experts  leaders  were 
selected  to  manage  the  various  clubs  which  were 
soon  formed.  It  became  the  duty  of  these  man- 
agers to  determine  the  style  of  play  to  be  followed 
by  their  respective  teams  and  to  teach  the  re- 
cruits the  fine  points  of  professional  baseball. 
These  fine  points,  subsequently  known  as  "in- 
"si3e  baseball,"  acquired  by  the  managers  only 
after  years  of  experience,  were  imparted  to  the 
chosen  few;  that  is,  to  the  members  of  the  clubs. 
Amateur  players  and  the  general  public  were  left 
to  pick  up  baseball  knowledge  as  they  could — all 
the  while  considering  the  "inside  baseball"  of 
professionalism  as  something  sacred  and  un- 
knowable. As  a  result,  we  have  baseball  played 
in  two  ways:  one  in  which  the  players  have  not 
had  the  opportunity  of  learning  the  best  methods 
of  play;  and  the  other,  in  which  the  players  are 
all  schooled  by  experienced  masters  of  the  game. 
One  class  of  players  is  carried  away  by  the  thrill 
of  bodily  action  and  the  excitement  of  contest, 
faiUng  to  bring  their  minds  properly  into  the  play. 
The  other  class  of  players,  through  experience 
and  careful  instruction,  are  made  to  bring  all 
their  faculties  into  play  at  all  stages  of  the  game. 


viii  INTRODUCTION 

In  the  present  work,  the  authors,  after  careful 
study  based  on  personal  experience,  inquiry,  and 
comparison,  have  formulated  for  the  geiieral  pub- 
lic, including  the  amateur  and  professional  player, 
the  whole  subject  of  baseball  as  it  is  played  in  the 
most  advanced  circles,  namely,  in  the  major 
leagues. 

In  addition,  chapters  are  included  which  should 
be  of  interest  and  value  to  spectators  of  the  game 
and  to  college  ball-players. 

W.  J.  c. 
F.  T.  D. 


CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  PACK 

^  I.    The  Catcher i 

^  II.    The  Pitcher 20 

^III.    The  First-Baseman S3 

u  IV.    The  Second-Baseman 63 

i-   V.    The  Short-Stop 80 

u  VI.    The  Third-Baseman 91 

^  VII.    The  Outfielder 102 

^    VIII.     Batting 112 

IX.     Base-Running 125 

X.    Team  Plays 146 

XI.  Hints  to  College  Players     ....  179 

XII.     Hints  to  Spectators 186 

Diagrams i97 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

A  Straight  overhand  delivery Frontispiece 

FACING  PAGE 

The  catcher  receiving  a  low-thrown  ball  from  the  pitcher  2 
The  pitcher  delivering  an  underhand  fast  ball  .  .  30 
The  out-curve 


The  drop-curve 

The  out-drop 
The  knuckle-ball 
The  fast  ball 


32 


34 


The  slow  ball 36 

First-baseman*s  footwork 54 

Correct  way  of  fielding  a  low-thrown  ball  (pick-up) 

at  first ^6 

Position  of  batter  in  preparing  for  close  ball      .      ,      .  114 

Completion  of  a  correct  swing  in  hitting       ....  118 

The  fall-away  slide 130 


THE  CATCHER 
Receiving  the  Ball 

A  catcher  first  of  all  should  be  a  clean  receiver; 
that  is,  he  should  be  able  to  catch  and  hold  any 
kind  of  a  ball  the  pitcher  may  throw.  Since  it  is 
the  catcher  who  signals  to  the  pitcher  for  the  par- 
ticular kind  of  ball  to  be  thrown,  the  catcher  can 
always  be  ready  to  handle  the  ball  cleanly.  He 
should  take  his  position  behind  the  home-plate  and 
as  close  to  it  as  possible  (just  out  of  reach  of  the 
batter's  club),  with  both  feet  squarely  on  the 
ground.  (For  battery  signals  see  Team  Plays  29.) 
The  left  foot  should  be  slightly  ahead  of  the  right, 
as  this  position  will  shorten  the  step  necessary  for 
the  catcher  as  he  throws.  Many  catchers  make 
the  mistake  of  becoming  rigid,  and,  with  tightened 
muscles,  fighting  the  ball,  as  it  were.  This  atti- 
tude is  decidedly  the  wrong  one.  The  catcher 
should  be  the  most  alert  man  on  the  team,  for 
he  is  allowed  the  least  amount  of  time  to  change 
his  position  in  receiving  the  ball;  hence  he  should 
be  free  in  every  muscle. 


2/.  w,.;  .•;......!  '.'BASEBALL 

While  receiving  tlie  low  ball,  the  catcher  should 
not  squat,  with  the  hands  in  an  upright  position; 
he  should  rather  drop  the  hands  (fingers  down- 
ward). (See  illustration.)  But  after  catching  a 
low  ball  he  should  not  continue  the  downward 
course  of  the  ball  with  the  glove;  the  better  way 
is  to  bring  it  up  gracefully  and  easily.  This  up- 
ward motion  will  sometimes  cause  the  ball  to  be 
called  a  strike,  while  if  the  hands  went  down  it 
would  be  a  ball. 

While  giving  signals  and  studying  base-runners, 
the  catcher  should  sit  on  his  haunches;  and  when 
catching  behind  small  batters,  he  should  stay  in 
the  squatting  position.  This  gives  the  pitcher 
a  better  mark  at  which  to  throw.  If  the  ball 
approaches  or  touches  the  ground,  it  should  be 
met  with  the  broadside  of  the  glove,  naturally, 
since  this  presents  the  greatest  surface;  and  low, 
ground  balls  should  be  smothered  when  it  is  not 
possible  to  play  them  cleanly.  The  catcher,  in 
order  to  make  certain  of  blocking  ground  balls, 
should,  if  possible,  get  his  whole  body  in  front  of 
the  ball — presenting  the  solid  front  of  feet,  legs, 
glove,  arms,  and  breast  protector.  A  catcher 
should  practise  this  play  deliberately;  should  have 
a  player  throw  balls  into  the  dirt,  that  he  may 
become  accustomed  to  handling  low  ground  balls 
from  the  pitcher. 


1^ 


THE  CATCHER  3 

It  should  be  a  firmly  ingrained  habit  with  the 
catcher  never  to  drop  the  hall,  neither  in  the  most 
informal  pr?ctice,  nor  in  a  game.  Carelessness 
in  practice  brings  about  uncertainty  of  control 
in  games. 

Catchers,  hold  the  ball !  and  when  catching  and 
throwing  the  ball,  keep  the  head  up,  and  eyes 
ahead,  avoid  looking  down  at  the  ground  while 
swinging  the  arm  back  prior  to  throwing.  That 
quick  glance  at  the  ground  before  taking  the 
step  to  throw  was  probably  necessary  when  our 
grandfathers  played  in  pastures  where  the  footing 
was  uncertain;  but  to-day  we  are  reasonably 
certain  of  having  firm,  level  ground  beneath  our 
feet;  therefore,  the  eyes  may  be  used  entirely  in 
following  the  play.  With  catchers  and  basemen 
the  positions  of  the  bases  ought  to  be  so  firmly 
fixed  in  their  minds'  eye  that  conscious  searching 
for  them  is  unnecessary. 

Throwing 

In  order  to  be  of  full  value  to  a  team,  the  catcher 
must  be  able  to  throw  accurately  with  speed,  and 
without  delay.  Instantaneous  delivery  of  the 
ball  is  necessary  when  a  man  is  stealing  a  base. 
But  a  speedy  ball  cannot  make  up  for  a  delay 
in  getting  the  ball  off — the  base-runner  is  either 
safe  or  out  generally  by  the  smallest  fraction  of 


4  BASEBALL 

a  second;  therefore  any  false  motion  on  the  part 
of  the  catcher  after  receiving  the  ball  from  the 
pitcher  may  allow  the  base-runner  to  steal  a  base. 
The  catcher  should  catch  the  ball,  shift  his  feet 
into  the  throwing  posture,  and  draw  back  his  arm 
simultaneously;  then  he  should  instantly  send  the 
ball  on  a  line  to  the  base. 

Returning  the  Ball  to  the  Pitcher 

Return  the  ball  so  that  it  can  be  handled  easily 
by  him.  Don't  make  him  jump  or  stoop  for  the 
ball.  On  hot  days  work  the  pitcher  slowly.  It  is 
very  advisable  for  the  catcher  to  get  into  the  habit 
of  returning  the  ball  to  the  pitcher  with  a  clean, 
sharp  delivery.  This  kind  of  return  keeps  the 
pitcher  alert,  active,  and  "in  the  game."  The 
ball  should  be  thrown  with  the  same  motion  that 
the  catcher  uses  in  throwing  to  a  base;  and  the 
ball  should  be  thrown  high — at  about  the  level 
of  the  pitcher's  head.  (This  ball,  therefore,  with 
a  little  more  speed,  will  be  exactly  the  same  as 
used  in  throwing  to  second  base.) 

When  There  Is  a  Base-Runner  on  First  Base 

The  catcher,  after  receiving  the  ball  from,  the 
pitcher,  should  glance  at  first  base  before  begin- 
ning the  forward  motion  of  the  arm  in  returning 
the  ball  to  the  pitcher.     This  action  will  assist 


THE  CATCHER  5 

the  catcher  in  preventing  the  runner  from  making 
the  "delayed  steal."  (For  definition  of  "delayed 
steal"  see  Team  Play  24.) 

Throwing  to  Bases  ^ 

The  catcher  should  constantly  practise  assum- 
ing the  throwing  posture  with  great  swiftness. 
His  success  as  a  thrower  depends  upon  the  rapidity 
with  which  he  can  catch  and  throw  the  ball,  and 
proficiency  in  these  acts  can  be  obtained  only  by 
making  this  swiftness  a  habit  through  early  and 
constant  practice. 

During  the  early  part  of  the  season  when  base- 
running  is  being  practised,  the  catcher  should 
avail  himself  of  every  opportunity  to  throw  to 
bases  to  catch  runners.  Practise  throwing  to 
bases  with  your  mask  and  protector  on,  just  as 
you  do  in  a  game.  Too  often  catchers  throw  with 
these  implements  on  only  during  a  game — going 
through  the  practice  without  them;  then  when 
they  do  put  them  on,  they  cannot  throw  accurately 
and  quickly. 

The  catcher  should  not  allow  the  batter  to 
bother  him,  but  should  throw  as  freely  as  though 
there  were  no  batter  near  him.  If  the  batter 
interferes  in  any  way  with  the  catcher's  throw- 
ing, the  batter  will  be  declared  out.  (In  case  the 
batter  does  interfere,  it  is  well  for  the  catcher  to 


6  BASEBALL 

emphasize  this  interference,  and  call  the  umpire's 
attention  to  it.) 

It  is  only  through  this  constant  practice  of 
throwing  to  catch  runners  (always  having  a  bat- 
ter hitting  at  the  ball),  that  a  catcher  can  get  con- 
fidence in  himself;  and  this  confidence  will  enable 
him  to  avoid  calling  for  waste  halls,  (For  definition 
of  waste  halls  see  Team  Play  29.)  When  a  catcher 
gets  into  the  habit  of  calling  for  waste  balls,  he 
constantly  gets  his  pitcher  into  difficulty,  merely 
to  protect  himself  against  having  a  base  stolen. 
When  a  pitcher  has  wasted  one  or  two  balls  on 
a  batter,  the  batter  has  the  decided  advantage 
over  the  pitcher,  and  will,  if  he  be  an  intelligent 
player,  generally  hit  the  next  ball,  knowing  that 
the  pitcher  will  try  to  get  a  strike  over  on  him. 

This  constant  practice  mentioned  above,  of 
throwing  to  catch  base-runners,  will  enable  the 
catcher  to  throw  under  all  circumstances — ^which 
is  one  of  the  most  valuable  assets  he  can  have. 

Throwing  to  First  Base 

When  the  catcher  has  fielded  a  batted  ball,  he 
should  throw  to  first  base  with  an  underhanded 
swing — ^without  straightening  up — always  throw^ 
ing  to  the  second-hase  side  of  first  at  least  four  feet, 
to  avoid  hitting  the  runner.    This  also  allows  the 


THE  CATCHER  7 

first-baseman  to  catch  the  ball  without  fear  of  col- 
lision with  the  runner.  The  catcher  should  try  for 
all  slow  hit  balls  that  are  within  his  reach  or  that 
of  the  pitcher,  and  if  he  can  get  the  ball  should 
tell  the  pitcher  so.  His  immediate  start  after 
the  ball  will  help  him  to  recover  all  balls  within 
his  reach;  and  if  the  ball  is  out  of  his  reach,  he 
will  at  least  have  done  all  in  his  power.  The  least 
hesitation  on  the  part  of  the  catcher  to  field  a 
bunt  or  short  hit  is  fatal;  hence  the  necessity  of 
getting  the  habit  of  trying  for  everything,  "with 
the  crack  of  the  bat."  The  catcher,  when  the 
runner  is  forced  at  home,  should  touch  home-base 
and  quickly  throw  the  ball  to  first  base  three  or 
four  feet  to  the  left  of  the  base.  He  should  study 
the  base-runners  carefully  before  giving  signals. 
This  will  often  enable  him  to  diagnose  their  in- 
tentions. There  is  a  strong  probability  that  if  the 
batter  intends  to  attempt  a  sacrifice  bunt,  the  run- 
ner will  take  a  long  lead  off  first.  (Read  Team 
Play  19.)  It  is  advisable  occasionally,  when  the 
bunt  is  expected,  to  call  for  a  waste  ball  and  snap 
the  ball  to  first  base  to  try  to  catch  the  runner  off 
the  base.  (Since  the  first-baseman  will  see  the  sig- 
nal for  a  waste  ball,  he  will  know  what  the  play  is 
to  be  and  will  cover  first  base  to  receive  the  ball.) 
The  ball,  on  this  play,  should  be  thrown  low,  on 
the  inside  of  the  base  if  possible,  thus  allowing 


8  BASEBALL 

the  baseman  to  put  the  ball  directly  on  the  foot 
of  the  runner  as  he  sHdes  back  to  the  base.  When 
there  is  a  runner  on  first  and  second,  the  catcher 
can  throw  to  first  base  to  catch  the  runner  (either 
using  the  waste  ball  or  not);  then,  if  the  catcher 
thinks  that  the  runner  on  second  will  go  to  third 
if  the  same  play  is  again  attempted,  he  can  feint 
to  throw  to  first,  run  into  the  diamond  and  trap 
the  runner  between  second  and  third  if  he  attempts 
to  go  to  third. 

For  plays  in  which  to  retire  the  runner  on  first 
base  see  Team  Plays  17  and  18. 

When  there  is  a  left-handed  batter  up,  the 
catcher,  using  the  batter  as  a  blind,  can  often 
slip  the  ball  to  first  base  and  catch  the  runner  off. 

Throwing  to  Seconp  Base 

When  there  is  a  man  on  first  base  the  catcher, 
as  mentioned  above,  should  study  the  base- 
runner.  The  catcher  may  often  detect  the 
runner's  intention  to  steal  second.  Anxiety  to  get 
a  good  lead,  nervousness  in  watching  the  pitcher, 
furtive  glances  at  the  coacher  or  the  players' 
bench,  any  unusual  action — these  often  indicate 
that  the  runner  will  steal.  If  these  indications 
are  strong  enough  to  justify  the  sacrifice  of  a 
ball,  the  catcher  should  call  for  a  waste  ball;  then, 


THE  CATCHER  9 

if  the  base-runner  is  stealing,  the  catcher  will  have 
the  ball  high  and  wide  from  the  pitcher,  away  from 
the  batter  in  a  good  position  to  throw  to  second 
base.  On  this  play,  with  a  right-handed  hitter  up, 
the  short-stop  will  receive  the  ball.  The  ball 
should  be  thrown  slightly  to  the  third-base  side  of 
second  base.  This  will  allow  the  short-stop  to 
catch  the  ball  while  on  the  run  without  overstep- 
ping the  base.  The  catcher,  as  he  makes  his  throw, 
should  not  watch  the  runner  but  should  keep  his 
eye  directly  on  second  base.  (First-baseman  should 
call  out:  "There  he  goes.")  When  there  are  no  pos- 
itive indications  that  the  runner  is  about  to  steal 
second,  the  catcher  will,  of  course,  call  for  various 
kinds  of  balls;  and  whether  the  second-baseman 
or  short-stop  will  receive  the  throw,  if  the  runner 
steals  second^  depends  upon  what  kind  of  a  hall  the 
pitcher  throws  and  whether  the  batter  be  a  dead 
right  or  left  field  hitter.  For  instance:  If,  with  a 
right-handed  batter  up,  the  catcher  signals  for  a 
curve,  the  second-baseman  will  cover  second;  be- 
cause a  curved  ball,  being  slower  than  a  straight 
one,  will  generally  be  hit  to  the  left  of  the  diamond 
— hence  the  necessity  of  the  short-stop  remaining 
in  his  position.  If  the  catcher  signals  for  a  straight 
ball,  the  short-stop  covers  second  base.  In  each 
case  the  reverse  is  true  with  a  left-handed  batter 
up.     And  the  catcher  should  preferably  throw  the 


lo  BASEBALL 

ball  a  few  feet  to  that  side  of  the  base  from  which  the 
man  zvho  will  receive  it  is  coming. 

If  the  base-runner  on  second  base  takes  a  very 
big  lead  off  the  base,  the  catcher  should  occa- 
sionally throw  the  ball  to  second  base.  After 
doing  this  a  few  times  in  a  game,  if  the  runner 
persists  in  taking  a  long  lead  (and  plans  on  going 
to  third  if  the  catcher  throws  to  second),  it  is 
well  for  the  catcher  to  feint  to  throw  to  second, 
and  if  the  runner  starts  to  third,  to  run  into  the 
diamond  with  the  ball,  feinting  to  throw  first 
to  third  and  then  to  second — thus  getting  the 
runner  between  the  bases;  and  at  the  same 
time  shortening  the  distance  which  he  must 
finally  throw  to  catch  the  runner.  If  the  catcher 
were  to  throw  to  third  when  the  runner  starts  for 
that  base,  it  would  be  an  easy  matter  for  the 
runner  to  turn  and  go  back  to  second;  and  if  the 
catcher,  from  his  position  behind  the  plate,  were 
to  throw  to  second  the  runner  could  easily  run 
to  third. 

If  there  is  a  man  on  second,  and  none  out,  and 
the  batter  is  expected  to  bunt  (see  Team  Play 
19),  the  man  on  second  may  be  caught  frequently 
(since  he  is  leading  toward  third),  by  calling  for  a 
waste  ball  and  snapping  the  ball  to  second. 


THE  CATCHER  n 

Throwing  to  Third  Base 

A  great  deal  of  time  should  be  spent  in  prac- 
tising the  throw  to  third  base,  with  the  batter  in 
his  box  and  a  runner  going  from  second  to  third 
base.  The  throw  should  be  low  and  on  the  in- 
side corner  of  the  base. 

With  a  runner  on  first  and  third  if  the  runner 
on  first  starts  for  second  on  the  pitcher's  delivery, 
play  as  follows: 

The  catcher  must  either  throw  through  to  second 
(if  the  runner  attempts  to  steal  second)  or  make  a 
feint  to  throw  to  second,  and  then  throw  to  third. 
This  feint  (or  blufF)  must  be  made  by  using  a 
motion  identical  with  that  with  which  the  catcher 
throws  to  second — a  weak  attempt  will  be  useless 
to  draw  the  man  ofF  third  base.  (A  catcher  should 
practise  this  "blufF"  a  great  deal.)  Occasionally 
a  sharp  return  to  the  pitcher  will  be  effective; 
he  can  either  snap  the  ball  to  third  or  to  second, 
or  feint  and  throw  to  third. 

If  a  runner  on  third  base  is  taking  a  big  lead 
ofF  the  base,  it  is  well  to  snap  the  ball  to  the 
third-baseman  and  try  to  catch  the  runner  off  the 
base.  Sometimes  in  this  play  the  waste  ball  may 
be  called — this,  however,  depends  upon  how  well 
the  pitcher  is  working.  Waste  halls  ought  not  to 
he  called  for  if  the  pitcher  is  having  difficulty  with 
his  control! 


12  BASEBALL 

The  catcher  should  not  allow  base-runners  to 
take  big  leads  off  the  bases.  Frequently,  when 
three  men  are  on  bases,  these  men  take  big  leads, 
assuming  that  the  pitcher  and  catcher  are  too 
intent  upon  playing  for  the  batter  to  pay  any 
attention  to  them.  It  is  just  at  this  time,  there- 
fore, that  a  cool-headed  catcher  can  catch  base- 
runners  napping.  The  catcher  should  squat  ap- 
parently to  give  his  signal  to  his  pitcher — but 
really  to  study  the  base-runners — give  a  waste 
ball  signal  (which,  of  course,  the  basemen  get 
and  are  ready  to  cover  the  bases),  and  by  a  snap 
throw  drive  the  ball  to  one  of  the  bases.  This 
will  at  least  tend  to  make  the  runners  a  bit  less 
free  to  lead  off  the  bases. 

If  a  catcher  has  caught  a  man  between  third 
base  and  home,  he  should  run  the  man  back 
toward  third.  In  fact,  whenever  an  opposing 
base-runner  is  caught  between  bases,  he  should 
be  driven  on  the  dead  run  back  to  the  base  from 
which  he  came,  and  when  he  is  ten  or  fifteen  feet 
from  that  base,  the  ball  should  be  snapped — not 
thrown  easily — retiring  the  runner  by  a  single 
throw  if  possible.  It  is  rarely  necessary  to  make 
more  than  one  or  two  throws,  unless  it  be  to 
catch  the  opposing  pitcher,  who  must  be  kept 
going  as  long  as  possible.  If  a  runner  who  sees 
that  he  is  out  at  home  stops  and  runs  up  and 


THE  CATCHER  13 

down  the  line  (to  let  the  batter  go  to  second), 
the  catcher  should  run  him  back  to  third  as  fast 
as  he  can,  snapping  the  ball  to  the  third-baseman, 
who  can  put  the  man  out,  and  then  throw  to 
second  to  retire  the  man  trying  to  make  that 
base. 

Fielding  His  Position 

The  catcher  should  at  all  times  be  "on  his  toes," 
that  is,  swift  to  follow  the  ball  either  as  it  rolls  into 
the  diamond  off  the  batsman's  club,  or  is  fouled 
into  the  air;  instantly  throwing  off  his  mask  as  he 
goes  after  the  ball.  Having  studied  out  beforehand 
where  to  throw  the  hall,  if  called  upon  to  field  it,  he 
throws  it  without  wasting  time  in  figuring  out  the 
play. 

Before  the  game  starts,  the  catcher  should  note 
the  position  of  the  sun  and  the  direction  of  the 
wind  (especially  if  there  is  a  high  wind).  If  the 
sun  shines  directly  in  his  eyes,  it  is  advisable  to  let 
the  infielders  handle  high  fly  balls  if  they  can,  as 
they  will  have  the  sun  at  their  backs.  As  high 
foul  balls,  going  straight  up  in  the  air,  are  most 
puzzling  to  handle,  it  will  be  of  great  assistance  to 
the  catcher  if  he  knows  the  direction  of  the  wind, 
since  he  can  then  make  allowances  for  that  wind. 
By  tossing  a  bit  of  grass  or  dust  into  the  air  or  by 
looking  at  the  flags,  he  can  easily  determine  the 


14  BASEBALL 

direction  of  the  wind.  These  high  foul  flies  are 
especially  hard  to  judge  when  the  sky  is  very  clear 
(a  high  sky).  After  the  catcher  takes  his  first 
look  and  locates  the  ball,  he  should  drop  his  eyes 
momentarily  to  the  ground  (this  will  relieve  the 
strain  on  the  eyes);  then  upon  the  next  upward 
look,  since  the  ball  will  be  well  on  its  downward 
course,  he  can  readily  judge  it.  By  gluing  the  eyes 
to  the  ball  when  it  is  high  in  the  air,  a  catcher 
often  finds  himself  going  around  in  a  circle — fre- 
quently misjudging  the  ball  entirely. 

Practice  and  careful  observation  will  soon  en- 
able a  catcher  to  tell  by  the  sound  of  a  foul  whether 
it  has  gone  into  the  air  in  such  a  way  that  it  can 
be  recovered  by  him.  If  there  is  only  a  slight 
tick,  he  will  know  that  the  ball  has  merely  risen 
a  little  out  of  its  original  course,  and  will  go  almost 
on  a  line  to  the  back-stop.  But  if  there  is  a  de- 
cidedly heavy  crack,  the  chances  are  that  it  has 
gone  nearly  straight  up;  then  he  must  sweep  his 
mask  off  as  he  whirls  to  start  after  it,  all  the  while 
looking  up  in  search  of  the  ball.  Speed  in  whirhng, 
speed  in  throwing  off  the  mask,  and  speed  in  getting 
started  after  the  ball  are  all  necessary  to  a  good 
catcher.  The  pitcher  can  help  his  catcher  in  the 
matter  of  fouls — by  yelling  to  him  ij  the  foul  can-' 
not  he  caught.  Otherwise  the  catcher  should  try 
for  everything. 


THE  CATCHER  15 

There  are  only  two  occasions  when  the  catcher 
should  leave  his  own  position  and  go  to  hack  up — 
(reinforce)  another  player.  One  occurs  when, 
with  a  man  on  first  base,  the  batter  hits  into  a 
double  play.  The  catcher,  seeing  what  is  about 
to  happen,  should  run  from  his  position  to  a  point 
about  30  feet  back  of  first  base,  in  a  direct  line 
with  the  throw  from  second  to  first.  On  this  play 
the  catcher  should  start  with  the  batter,  and  should 
run  with  all  his  speed  obliquely  to  the  point  named. 
If  the  throw  is  bad,  he  can  recover  the  ball  and 
catch  the  runner  as  he  rounds  first  base  on  his  way 
to  second.  This  play  does  not  happen  every  day; 
yet  many  a  game  has  been  saved  by  the  catcher 
taking  this  position.  (See  Diagram  I,  page  199.) 
The  catcher  should  also  back  up  first  base  when, 
with  no  runners  on  base,  the  second-baseman  is 
fielding  a  ball  where  the  throw  must  be  made 
hurriedly.  Here  the  chances  of  the  ball  being 
thrown  badly  are  increased;  therefore  the  catcher 
can  be  of  use. 

Then,  too,  this  quick  start  with  the  batter  will 
help  to  keep  the  catcher's  legs  limbered  up,  since 
the  stooping  posture  which  the  catcher  assumes 
while  giving  signals  tends  to  harden  and  stiffen 
the  legs  and  muscles. 

When  receiving  the  ball  on  throws  from  the  out- 
field to  prevent  a  man  from  scoring,  the  catcher 


i6  BASEBALL 

should  station  himself  on  the  home-plate  as  a  tar- 
get at  which  the  fielder  can  throw.  As  the  ball 
comes  in,  however,  he  should  so  place  himself  as 
to  have  his  body  in  front  of  the  ball  (blocking  it  if 
necessary).  Upon  catching  the  ball,  he  should 
speedily  meet  the  runner  and  tag  him  as  far  as  pos- 
sible from  the  home-base,  touching  him  with  the 
ball  in  such  a  way  that  he  cannot  slide  either 
around  or  under  the  ball.  By  waiting  for  the  run- 
ner to  come  to  the  catcher  (after  he  has  the  ball) 
the  catcher  often  fails  to  put  the  man  out.  All 
thrown  balls  from  the  outfield  that  look  as  though 
they  would  land  three  or  four  feet  in  front  of  home- 
base  should  be  reached  for  and  caught  before  they 
bound  (handled  as  a  first-baseman  catches  his  low 
throws) — thus  avoiding  the  necessity  of  handling 
a  very  difficult  bound;  then  the  catcher  should 
whirl  and  put  the  ball  on  the  runner. 

Working  With  His  Pitcher 

The  most  valuable  catcher  is  the  one  who  will 
forget  himself  entirely  and  devote  all  his  attention 
to  easing  the  duties  of  his  pitcher,  and  making  him 
more  efficient.  For  instance,  if,  when  there  is  a 
runner  on  third  base,  the  catcher  knows  that  the 
batter  cannot  hit  a  drop-ball,  he  should  call  for 
that  ball,  no  matter  how  hard  it  may  be  to  catch. 

First  of  all,  the  catcher  should  study  the  batter. 


THE  CATCHER  17 

He  should  try  to  diagnose  from  the  batter's  general 
attitude,  step,  swing,  etc.,  just  what  kind  of  ball  he 
will  most  Hkely  not  be  able  to  hit.  If  the  catcher 
is  not  at  all  familiar  with  the  batter's  style,  of 
course  it  is  impossible  to  tell  absolutely  what  he 
will  do.  But  there  are  certain  points  about  a  bat- 
ter that  quite  generally  indicate  what  kind  of  ball 
he  likes.  (Of  course,  there  are  some  batters  who 
hit  almost  any  kind  of  a  ball.)  Now,  if  a  batter 
pulls  his  front  foot  away  from  the  base,  and  has  a 
tendency  to  throw  his  body  decidedly  in  the  same 
direction,  it  is  quite  probable  that  he  will  hit  an 
inside  ball;  therefore  the  catcher  should  call  for 
balls  on  the  outside  corner  of  the  base,  as  they  will 
be  most  difficult  for  the  batter  to  hit.  If  a  batter, 
stands  close  to  his  base  and  uses  a  long  bat,  it  will 
be  difficult  for  him  to  hit  a  close  ball.  A  batter 
with  a  long  bat  standing  away  from  the  base  gen- 
erally finds  difficulty  in  hitting  a  wide  drop-ball. 

After  a  batter  has  made  a  clean  safe  hit,  the 
catcher  should  make  a  deliberate  eff'ort  to  remem- 
ber just  what  kind  of  a  ball  it  was  that  the  batter 
hit — and  he  should  not  call  for  that  ball  when  the 
same  batter  comes  up  again — but  should  try  him 
on  something  else. 

It  does  not  require  much  observation  to  enable 
a  catcher  to  discover  into  which  field  a  batter  hits 
naturally.    And  when  the  catcher  has  satisfied 


i8  BASEBALL 

himself  that  a  batter  hits  into  a  certain  field,  he 
should  call  for  those  balls  which  will  tend  to  make 
the  batter  hit  into  the  opposite  field.  For  instance, 
if  a  right-handed  batter  hits  naturally  into  left  field, 
the  catcher  should  make  the  pitcher  keep  the  ball 
on  the  outside  corner  of  the  base,  thus  forcing  the 
batter  to  hit  into  right  field.  It  will  be  found  that 
if  this  batter  is  forced  to  hit  outside  balls,  he  will 
not  be  able  to  hit  as  hard  or  well;  and  often  he  will 
be  unable  to  hit  at  all.  Of  course,  success  in  thus 
pitching  to  batters  depends  upon  the  pitcher's 
ability  to  give  the  catcher  just  the  kind  of  ball 
called  for.  The  catcher  should  get  into  the  habit 
of  requiring  a  definitely  placed  ball  every  time  he 
signals;  it  must  be  either  high  or  low  and  either 
close  to  the  batter,  or  on  the  outside  of  the  base; 
but  rarely  over  the  centre,  waist-high,  unless  abso^ 
lutely  necessary. 

When  there  are  men  on  bases  and  the  ball  is  hit 
to  the  pitcher,  the  catcher  should  coach  him  where 
to  throw  the  ball.  On  these  plays,  the  catcher 
has  everything  in  front  of  him,  while  the  pitcher 
usually  has  his  back  to  the  base-runners.  So,  if 
the  catcher  calls  out  immediately  to  the  pitcher, 
the  latter  can  whirl  and  throw  without  any  hesi- 
tation. 

It  is  advisable  for  a  catcher  always  to  have  two 
gloves  ready  for  use — in  case  something  happens 


THE  CATCHER  19 

to  the  glove  he  is  using.  While  breaking  in  a  new 
glove,  he  can  use  the  new  one  when  there  are  no 
runners  on  bases — laying  the  old  one  on  the 
ground  beside  him  to  be  used  when  the  bases  are 
occupied  by  runners. 

A  catcher  should  see  to  it  that  his  chest-pro- 
tector is  pliable,  not  stiff  or  blown  up  hard.  Stiff- 
ness in  the  protector  impedes  throwing  and  makes 
squatting  uncomfortable. 


II 

THE  PITCHER 

Little  need  be  said  of  the  relative  value  of  a 
pitcher  to  his  team.  To  any  one  who  knows  base- 
ball at  all,  this  value  is  quite  apparent.  Other 
things  being  equal,  the  team  with  the  best 
pitcher  usually  wins.  And  yet  how  few  people 
know  just  what  constitutes  good  pitching !  To 
the  average  spectator,  a  man  seems  to  be  a  good 
pitcher  if  he  has  lots  of  speed  and  good  curves. 
But  to  a  close  student  of  the  game  it  becomes  at 
once  apparent  that  a  first-class  pitcher  must  have 
a  fast  ball  (and  generally  a  curve),  a  slow  ball, 
and  control.  The  last-named  quaHfication  is  the 
vitally  important  one. 

Control 

And  yet  how  few  pitchers  to-day  can  define 
the  word  control!  The  significance  of  the  word 
pitcher  to  them  is  that  he  is  one  of  nine  men 
occupying  a  definite  position  in  the  game  of  base- 
ball. He  works  by  prearranged  signals  with  the 
catcher,  who  may — for  illustration — use  one  finger 

20 


THE  PITCHER  21 

♦ 

for  a  fast  ball  and  two  fingers  for  a  curve  ball. 
We  will  grant  that  the  pitcher  has  an  abundance 
of  speed  and  good  curves;  if  the  catcher  signals 
for  the  fast  ball,  it  is  thrown,  high  or  low,  over 
the  centre  of  the  plate  or  wide — it  does  not  seem 
to  matter  much  to  the  pitcher — he  has  pitched  a 
fast  ball  since  it  was  called  for.  The  same  thing 
is  often  true  of  the  curve  ball.  And  the  majority 
of  pitchers  to-day  are  satisfied  to  let  it  go  at  that ! 
How  often  one  hears  the  remark,  "He  has  every- 
thing in  the  box  to-day;  yet  the  opposing  batters 
are  hitting  the  ball  all  over  the  field,"  and  again, 
"He  has  a  thousand-dollar  arm  and  a  five-cent 
head." 

These  pitchers  think  that  control  means  plac- 
ing every  ball  that  they  throw  right  over  the 
heart  of  the  base,  waist-high.  That  is  exactly 
what  it  does  not  mean.  Strictly  speaking,  con- 
trol  means  that  ability  in  a  pitcher  which  enables 
him  (after  studying  the  batter)  to  throw  that  ball 
which  the  batter  cannot  hit  safely — always  plac- 
ing it  either  high  or  low  (at  the  shoulders  or  knees) 
and  either  on  the  inside  or  outside  corner  of  the 
base,  avoiding  the  waist-high  hall  over  the  centre 
of  the  base. 

Study  the  batsman  as  he  takes  his  position  to 
hit.  In  delivering  the  fast  ball,  try  to  place  it 
at  what  is  the  batter's  weakest  point.    And  in 


22  BASEBALL 

pitching  the  curve,  try  to  break  it  low;  that  is 
the  only  safe  and  successful  place  to  break  it. 

How  often  the  remark  is  heard  that  "He  hasn't 
a  thing  but  a  glove!"  and  yet  this  same  pitcher 
may  be  a  consistent  winner.  But  study  him 
well,  and  it  will  be  found  that  he  has  two  of 
the  greatest  assets — namely,  brains  and  control: 
brains  to  note  and  remember  a  batter's  weakness, 
and  the  control  to  pitch  to  it. 

The  pitcher,  on  those  days  when  he  is  not 
pitching,  should  study  the  batters  from  the  bench. 
This  will  enable  him  to  pick  out  the  various  bat- 
ters' weaknesses,  and  he  can  use  the  knowledge 
thus  gained  when  he  is  in  the  box.  While  in  the 
game,  remember  the  balls  which  the  various 
batters  hit  successfully — and  try  something  else 
on  them  the  next  time  they  are  at  bat.  If  you 
find  that  during  the  game  you  are  being  hit  freely, 
stop  and  try  to  "think  out"  what  the  trouble 
is;  and  the  chances  are  you  will  find  that  you 
have  been  putting  the  ball  over  the  middle  of 
the  base,  breaking  your  curves  high,  or  giving 
the  batters  just  what  they  like.  Stop  and  think! 
Do  not  become  enraged  and  try  to  drive  the  ball 
past  the  batter's  club,  because  "the  faster  they 
come,  the  farther  they  will  go"  (unless  you 
mix  a  little  brains  with  your  speed).  In  these 
days  when   everybody   has   the   art  of  curving 


THE  PITCHER  23 

the  ball  the  successful  pitcher  depends  to  a  great 
extent  upon  a  change  of  pace;  that  is,  the  alter- 
nating of  fast  balls  with  curves  and  slow  balls. 
This  change  of  pace  will  do  more  than  anything 
else  to  prevent  being  hit  freely. 

Early-Season  Training 

As  is  true  in  the  case  of  every  ball  player,  the 
pitcher  should  begin  his  early-season  training  by 
getting  his  whole  body  into  good  condition.  It 
is  a  grave  mistake  to  think  that  all  a  pitcher  has^ 
to  do  is  to  get  his  arm  into  shape  to  throw  nine 
innings  twice  a  week.  Many  a  pitcher  has  weak- 
ened in  the  last  part  of  the  game,  not  because 
his  arm  was  not  powerful  enough,  but  because 
the  rest  of  his  physique  was  exhausted;  he  had 
neglected  the  rest  of  his  body  while  training  the 
arm  alone.  Road-work,  dumb-bells,  handball,  any-  ^vv 
thing  to  bring  all  the  muscles  into  play,  regularly, 
and  out-of-doors  if  possible,  will  give  a  man 
the  right  start  in  his  training.  And  during  the 
early-season  work,  the  pitchers,  when  not  in 
the  box,  should  work  hard  to  get  their  legs  in 
good  condition.  To  get  good  wind  and  endurance  i^ 
chase  fly  balls  in  the  outfield.  Practise  fielding 
bunts  off  the  side  lines;  this  will  help  wonderfully  ^*' 
in  games — and  the  work  will  help  to  put  you  in 
sound   condition.    Another  excellent  exercise  is 


24  BASEBALL 

that  of  batting  fly  balls  to  the  outfield;  swinging 
the  bat  will  strengthen  the  arms  and  the  back 
muscles.  In  order  to  pitch  a  long,  hard  game, 
your  whole  body  will  be  called  upon  to  reinforce 
your  arm,  and  you  will  be  called  upon  to  hit  and 
run  bases  like  any  other  player;  so  prepare  your- 
self by  careful  training. 

Getting  Control  and  Caring  for  the  Arm 

The  importance  of  control  has  been  empha- 
sized above;  we  shall  now  deal  with  the  methods 
of  acquiring  it.  Some  pitchers  have  no  difficulty 
with  control;  it  comes  to  them  naturally,  just 
as  batting  comes  naturally  to  some  players.  But 
most  pitchers  are  not  so  fortunate;  they  acquire 
control  only  after  long  practice.  If  you  are  one 
of  the  less  fortunate,  work  to  get  your  eye  and 
muscles  so  trained  that  perfect  co-ordination  fol- 
lows; in  other  words,  so  that  you  can  control  the 
ball.  If  necessary,  pitch  to  a  mark  on  a  piece 
of  canvas,  or  an  old  mattress  set  up  against  the 
wall.  Make  lines  on  the  mattress  (or  canvas)  at 
the  height  of  a  batter's  knees  and  shoulders — put 
up  sticks  or  boards  six  inches  from  each  side  of 
the  base  to  indicate  the  batter's  position.  Then 
throw  with  the  deUberate  intention  of  placing  the 
ball  at  a  definite  spot.  Some  managers  advocate 
pitching  to  a  dummy  of  the  average  batter's  size. 


THE  PITCHER  25 

Take  a  half-dozen  balls  and  deliver  them  at  the 
mark  one  after  another;  walk  after  them,  return 
to  your  position  and  pitch  again — the  walk  will 
limber  you  up.  Repeat  this  for  half  an  hour,  day 
after  day,  and  the  result  will  be  generally  quite 
gratifying.  Of  course,  if  it  is  possible  to  have 
somebody  catch  for  you,  so  much  the  better. 

It  is  imperative,  however,  that  the  season  be 
started  with  easy,  slow,  graceful  throwing  move- 
ments.    Increase  the  speed  day  b}''  day — learn- 
ing to  keep  the  fast  ball  high  or  low — at  the  *v 
shoulder  or  knee. 

Develop  the  overhanded  motion  as  much  as 
possible  with  the  long,  swinging  motion  of  the 
arm;  follow  the  forward  motion  of  the  arm  with 
the  body,  leaning  forward  as  you  throw.  Bring 
the  back  into  play  as  much  as  possible;  this  will 
increase  your  speed  and  decrease  the  strain  on 
your  arm.  (See  frontispiece.)  Avoid  using  the 
short,  jerky  elbow  motion  in  delivering  the  ball. 
Always  remember  to  throw  the  hall  at  some  particular 
spoty  either  high  or  low,  on  the  inside  or  outside 
corner.  The  corners  count  as  much  as  across  the 
middle,  and  these  balls  are  hard  to  hit  safely. 

A  week's  practice  on  the  fast  ball  will  strengthen 
the  arm  sufficiently  to  allow  gradual  work  on  the 
curve.  Do  not  throw  the  curved  ball  until  the 
arm  has  been  made  perfectly  strong  by  the  use 


26  BASEBALL 

of  speed  (straight  balls).  Many  pitchers  have 
ruined  their  arms  by  beginning  to  throw  curves 
before  their  arms  were  strong.  The  arm  may 
feel  strong  very  early  in  the  season,  but  it  really 
is  not;  the  muscles  are  tender  and  are  easily 
strained — especially  by  throwing  curves.  Right 
here  applies  the  old  saying  that  "A  man  is  weak- 
est when  at  his  strongest."  Begin  by  throwing 
the  curve  slowly;  then  increase  the  speed  day  by 
day — never  losing  sight  of  the  fact  that  every 
ball  delivered  must  be  over  some  part  of  the  base. 

To  get  the  right  control,  pitch  to  batters  in 
their  position  as  much  as  your  arm  will  permit. 

Pitchers  who  are  working  for  control,  especially 
young  players  just  starting  out,  should  never 
try  to  pitch  when  the  arm  feels  tired,  "dead," 
or  heavy.  Light  work  during  the  early  spring 
(or  late  winter)  with  dumb-bells  and  pulleys  will 
strengthen  the  arms  and  back.  However,  a 
great  deal  of  this  kind  of  work  is  not  advisable, 
because  a  pitcher  does  not  need  a  large,  muscular 
arm;  such  arms  are  usually  somewhat  muscle- 
bound,  lacking  in  flexibleness  and  snap  qualities 
very  essential  to  the  pitcher's  arm.  Probably  one 
of  the  surest  indications  of  the  condition  of  the 
arm  is  the  weight  that  the  ball  seems  to  have.  If 
it  feels  light — and  your  arm  responds  readily — 
usually  your  arm  is  in  good  condition  to  pitch. 


THE  PITCHER  27 

But  if  the  ball  feels  heavy,  and  it  is  only  with  an 
effort  that  you  can  swing  your  arm,  then  be  care- 
ful. It  is  an  easy  matter  to  make  the  arm  sore; 
and  as  the  pitcher's  arm  is  his  greatest  asset,  ex-  ' 
treme  care  is  necessary  to  avoid  injuring  it.  The 
old  policy  of  "pitching  out"  a  soreness  is  a  dan- 
gerous experiment  to  try,  as  the  affected  parts 
are  usually  aggravated  all  the  more  by  forced 
exercise. 

Warming  Up 

Be  sure  to  have  your  arm  (and  body  too)  warm] 
before  beginning  to  pitch  hard.     Start  the  pre-/ 
liminary  throwing  slowly,  and  increase  the  speed  1 
gradually  until  the  required  warmth  is  produced.^ 
Fifteen  minutes  is  a  safe  time  limit  to  place  on 
the  warming-up  before  a  game;   the  last  four  or 
five  minutes  should  be  spent  in  throwing  the  ball 
as  hard  as  you  intend  to  in  the  game.     How  often 
have  games  been  won  and  lost  in  the  opening  in- 
nings before  the  pitcher  was  well  warmed  up ! 
The  pitcher  "hits  his  stride"  toward  the  last  of 
the  game — but  it  is  then  too  late.     To  go  into  the 
game  properly  warmed  up   means  to  pitch  the 
best  ball  from  the  very  beginning.    Always  keep 
the  arm  and  body  well  covered — a  good  woollen 
shirt  is  desirable.     (It  is  advisable  to  have  a  dry 
shirt  handy,  to  which  you  can  change  if  it  is 
necessary  to  remain  on  the  field.) 


28  BASEBALL 

Rubbing  the  Arm 

If  the  arm  feels  fresh  and  strong  and  is  without 
pain  or  heaviness,  stay  away  from  the  "rubber." 
It  is  a  bad  thing  to  get  into  the  habit  of  having 
the  arm  rubbed  constantly.  (Some  masseurs 
rub  the  life  all  out  of  the  arm.)  Continued  ap- 
plication of  liniments  to  the  arm  produces  what 
is  known  as  the  "medicine  arm" — that  is,  one 
which  depends  upon  the  stimulating  effects  of 
the  "rub";  in  this  case  the  muscles  lose  their 
natural  Hfe  and  demand  artificial  vigor.  Need- 
less to  say,  such  arms  soon  become  flabby  and 
useless  as  pitching  organs. 

The  tired,  overworked,  or  strained  arm  needs 
first  of  all — rest !  There  are  numerous  remedies 
for  sore  arms — every  trainer  has  a  different  one. 
They  are  all  surface  effects;  no  liniment  reaches 
the  sore  spot — ^yet  any  counter-irritant  will  help 
to  draw  the  soreness  out.  A  liberal  application 
of  hot  towels  is  as  good  as  anything.  If  the  arm 
feels  heavy  and  "dead,"  especially  if  there  is 
pain,  rest  it  for  a  few  days — don't  throw  at  all; 
for  in  doing  so  you  are  likely  to  ruin  it.  After 
four  or  five  days  of  rest,  begin  to  throw  gradually; 
and  if  there  is  no  pain,  and  the  arm  has  regained 
its  vigor,  then  work  carefully  to  prepare  your- 
self to  pitch.     It  is  well,  however,  during  this 


THE   PITCHER  29 

rest,  not  to  remain  absolutely  idle — the  exercise 
gained  in  chasing  balls  is  conducive  to  keeping 
in  good  physical  condition  (being  careful  not  to 
strain  the  arm  while  returning  the  balls). 

The  Waste  Ball 

There  are  times  when  it  is  absolutely  necessary 
for  the  catcher  to  receive  the  ball  beyond  the 
reach  of  the  batter  and  at  a  height  from  which 
it  is  easy  to  throw.  This  ball  is  called  the  waste 
ball,  because  it  is  virtually  wasted  on  the  batter. 

The  pitcher  should  develop  the  ability  to 
throw  this  ball  whenever  the  catcher  calls  for  it. 
It  should  be  thrown  high  and  outside  of  the  base 
away  from  the  batter — so  that  he  cannot  hit  it. 
It  is  pretty  certain  that  when  the  waste-ball  sig- 
nal is  given,  some  position  will  be  left  uncovered; 
therefore  do  all  in  your  power  to  perfect  the  play 
which  your  catcher  has  planned.  Nothing  is 
more  disheartening  to  a  fielder  than  to  have  a  ball 
hit  through  his  position,  which  he  has  left  in  order 
to  complete  some  signal  play. 

Holding  and  Throwing  the  Ball 

The  pitcher  should  hold  and  deHver  all  balls  as 
nearly  alike  as  possible  to  prevent  the  batter 
from  diagnosing  the  delivery.  For  instance,  if 
the  pitcher  delivers  the  fast  ball  with  an  over- 


30  BASEBALL 

hand  motion,  he  should  throw  his  curve  and  slow 
ball  the  same  way.  If  he  uses  the  overhand 
delivery  for  his  fast  ball,  and  a  side-arm  motion 
for  the  curve,  it  won't  take  an  opposing  team  long 
to  find  it  out;  and  then  they  can  always  tell 
ahead  of  time  just  what  to  expect. 

The  Fast  Ball 

In  delivering  the  fast  ball,  grasp  it  firmly  with 
the  first  two  fingers  and  the  thumb  and  let  it 
go  ofF  the  tip  of  the  fingers.  Some  pitchers  get 
the  best  results  by  placing  the  two  fingers  along 
the  seams,  each  finger  on  a  seam  (where  they  are 
closest  together,  see  illustration  facing  page  34); 
others  place  the  two  fingers  across  the  seams;  while 
others  have  success  by  grasping  it  with  the  fingers 
and  thumb  in  almost  any  position.  A  pitcher 
should  try  these  different  methods  and  adopt  the 
one  that  gives  him  the  best  results.  Start  this 
ball  and  deliver  it  either  in  the  manner  shown  in 
illustration  opposite  or  in  the  frontispiece.  When 
delivered  with  a  motion  that  is  between  straight 
overhand  and  side-arm,  this  ball,  with  all  the 
power  of  arm  and  back  behind  it,  will  break  a 
little  (that  is,  when  thrown  by  a  right-handed 
pitcher  to  a  right-handed  batter,  the  ball  bores  in 
toward  the  batter).  If  the  required  speed  is  pres- 
ent, the  ball  will  seem  to  hop  or  rise. 


THE    PITCHER    DELIVERING    AN   UNDERHAND    FAST    BALL. 


THE  PITCHER  31 

Keep  this  fast  ball  shoulder-high  and  as  near 
the  corners  of  the  plate  as  possible,  never  cut- 
ting the  centre  of  the  plate  unless  compelled  to; 
occasionally  throwing  it  low — at  the  batter's  knees. 
This  low  fast  ball  is  very  effective  when  alternated 
with  the  low  drop-ball — using  the  same  general  de- 
livery in  each  case.  A  pitcher  who  has  a  good  fast 
ball  which  he  can  control  is  not  compelled  to 
throw  many  curves — only  enough  to  unsettle  the 
batter  by  letting  him  know  that  he  has  a  variety. 

The  Out-Curve 
The  preliminary  motions  of  throwing  the  out- 
curve  are  the  same  as  those  of  throwing  the  fast 
ball — the  grip  on  the  ball,  the  wind-up,  and  the 
back  movement  are  identical  in  each  case.  But 
instead  of  letting  the  ball  go  off  the  tips  of  the 
fingers,  as  is  done  when  throwing  the  fast  ball, 
the  out-curve  is  produced  by  a  twist  of  the  wrist 
bringing  the  hand  across  in  front  of  the  body 
nearly  horizontally,  with  the  back  of  the  hand 
downward,  spinning  the  ball  with  nearly  a  vertical 
axis,  letting  it  go  out  between  the  thumb  and  the 
side  of  the  index-finger.  (See  illustration  facing 
page  32.) 

The  Drop-Curve 
The  preliminary  motions  of  throwing  this  ball 
should  be  the  same  as  those  of  throwing  the  fast 


32  BASEBALL 

ball  and  out-curve.  There  are  two  methods  of 
producing  this  curve. 

One  is  the  following:  The  ball  is  sent  spinning 
with  a  horizontal  axis  by  a  twist  of  the  wrist, 
bringing  the  hand  directly  downward — the  back 
of  the  hand  vertical — letting  the  ball  go  out  be- 
tween the  thumb  and  side  of  the  index-finger. 
(See  illustration  A  facing  this  page.) 

Another  method  of  throwing  the  drop-curve  is 
that  of  twisting  the  wrist  and  bringing  the  hand 
directly  downward  with  the  palm  up,  letting  the 
ball  go  out  between  the  tips  of  the  fingers  and 
thumb,  with  a  snap  of  the  wrist.  (See  illustra- 
tion B  facing  this  page.) 

The  Out-Drop 

Use  the  same  preliminary  motions  as  in  throw- 
ing the  fast  ball. 

This  curve  should  be  thrown  the  same  as  the 
out-curve,  except  that  instead  of  bringing  the  hand 
across  in  front  horizontally,  it  should  be  swept 
diagonally  outward  and  downward.  (See  illus- 
tration facing  page  34.) 

The  Change  of  Pace 

All  curve  balls  should  not  be  thrown  with  the 
same  speed.  It  is  very  effective  to  throw  curves 
(especially   drop-curves)    occasionally  with  very 


THE  OUT-CURVE. 

4 

""/T                H 

^^   ^^"-                              ^^ 

^i"           ■« 

^.  THE  DROP-CURVE. 


i^.  THE  DROP-CURVE. 


THE  PITCHER  33 

little  power  behind  them,  thus  producing  a  slow 
curve — or  what  is  known  as  a  change  of  pace.  This 
also  is  true  of  the  straight  ball. 

The  Slow  Ball 

This  ball  should  be  thrown  with  identically  the 
same  motion  as  the  fast  ball,  the  only  difference 
being  in  the  way  the  ball  is  held.  There  are 
several  methods  of  producing  the  slow  ball,  among 
which  the  following  are  most  common.  (It  is  ad- 
visable to  experiment  with  these  various  methods, 
and  to  adopt  one  only  after  being  convinced  that 
it  will  produce  the  best  results.) 

(fl)  Grasp  the  ball  with  the  first  two  fingers  and 
the  thumb,  pushing  the  ball  well  back  into  the 
hand  against  the  base  of  the  fingers  and  thumb. 
Then,  in  throwing  the  ball,  remove  the  ends  of  the 
fingers  from  the  ball,  grasping  it  with  the  thumb 
and  last  joints  of  the  fingers. 

Q?)  Deliver  the  ball  held  by  the  thumb  and  last 
two  fingers,  removing  the  first  two  fingers  entirely 
from  the  ball  upon  delivering  it. 

(c)  Deliver  the  ball  held  in  the  palm  of  the  hand 
by  the  thumb  and  little  finger — the  three  middle 
fingers  entirely  removed  from  the  ball.  (See  illus- 
trations A,  B,  and  C,  facing  page  36.) 

In  throwing  the  slow  ball,  the  pitcher  should 
avoid  making  a  slow  motion;   the  motion  should 


34  BASEBALL 

be  as  rapid  and  vigorous  as  though  producing  the 
fast  or  curved  ball.  It  is  only  in  this  way  that  the 
ball  can  be  made  deceptive. 

The  Knuckle  Ball 

Hold  the  ball  in  the  palm  of  the  hand,  grasped  by 
the  thumb  and  last  two  fingers,  with  the  first  two 
fingers  bent  in,  pressing  the  knuckles  against  the 
ball.  (See  illustration  facing  this  page.)  Some 
pitchers  press  the  knuckles  of  the  three  middle 
fingers  against  the  ball. 

The  knuckle  ball  is  curious  in  that  it  combines 
the  effects  of  the  slow  ball  with  the  drop-curve 
and  the  moist  ball. 

It  is,  however,  a  difficult  ball  to  control,  having 
been  mastered  by  but  few  pitchers. 

The  Moist  Ball  (Spit-Ball) 

Hold  the  ball  just  as  it  is  held  when  throwing 
the  fast  ball,  except  that  the  fingers  must  rest  on 
a  smooth  part  of  the  cover  (avoiding  the  seams) 
— the  thumb  preferably  across  the  seams.  The 
cover  of  the  ball  should  be  moistened  with  saliva 
under  the  ends  of  the  first  two  fingers. 

In  order  to  obtain  the  best  results,  this  ball 
should  be  thrown  with  considerable  speed,  just 
as  the  fast  ball  is  thrown. 


THE   FAST  BALL. 


THE  PITCHER  35 

Fielding  the  Position 

The  pitcher,  after  he  has  thrown  the  ball  to  the 
batter,  should  at  once  become  an  infielder — and 
he  can  be  a  very  important  one.  But  before  he 
does  deliver  the  ball,  he  should  plan  what  to  do 
with  the  ball  if  it  is  hit  to  him.  He  should  get 
into  the  habit  of  covering  first  base,  home-base, 
and  third  base;  and  also  of  backing  up  these 
bases  when  it  is  necessary. 

Whenever  the  pitcher  has  fielded  a  ball  and  is 
to  throw  to  a  base,  unless  the  throw  be  a  short 
one,  he  should  not  delay,  or  throw  the  ball 
slowly — a  quick,  true  throw  is  the  safest  way  to 
retire  the  runner. 

Few  conditions  are  more  fatal  to  a  ball  team 
than  that  of  having  weak  fielding  pitchers.  Once 
let  the  opponents  know  that  the  "slabman"  can't 
handle  batted  balls,  and  immediately  a  shower 
of  bunts  will  follow. 

A  great  deal  of  practice  should  be  put  on  han- 
dling batted  balls  of  all  kinds.  And  the  most 
practical  work  can  be  done  by  having  men  bunt 
and  then  run  to  first.  In  this  way  the  pitcher 
becomes  accustomed  to  throwing  on  the  inside 
of  the  base-line  away  from  the  path  of  the  runner; 
he  also  gains  practice  in  gauging  the  time  of  the 
throw. 


36  BASEBALL 

All  bunts  should  be  picked  up  and  thrown 
with  an  underhanded  motion.  Straightening  up 
to  throw  wastes  too  much  time.  Practise  fielding 
bunts  on  both  sides  of  the  diamond.  Start  after 
a  bunt  at  the  crack  of  the  bat — pick  it  up,  one  hand 
if  necessary,  and  snap  it  to  first  without  straighten- 
ing up — do  not  use  any  long  swing  with  this  motion. 
Practise  the  underhand  throw  to  first.  On  bunts 
between  the  pitcher  and  third-baseman  which 
the  third-baseman  gets,  the  pitcher  should  cover 
third  base  and  be  ready  to  receive  the  ball  in 
case  the  runner  is  coming  from  first  to  third,  on 
the  play. 

When  a  bunted  ball  rolls  between  the  pitcher 
and  the  catcher,  if  the  ball  can  be  handled  better 
by  the  pitcher,  he  should  call  out  **Mine"  !  The 
catcher  should  do  the  same  if  he  can  field  the  ball. 
This  calling  out  prevents  collisions. 

When  the  ball  is  hit  to  the  first-base  side  of 
the  diamond,  if  the  ball  is  not  within  the  pitcher's 
reach,  he  should  always  cover  first  base.  (He  is 
really  an  assistant  first-baseman.)  Very  fre- 
quently the  pitcher  will  have  to  cover  first  base 
with  such  speed  that  he  cannot  stop  at  the  base 
but  will  have  to  overrun  it.  When  running  at 
top  speed,  it  is  difficult  to  catch  the  ball,  touch 
the  base,  and  avoid  the  runner  all  at  once;  there- 
fore a  great  deal  of  practice  should  be  put  in  on 


A.     Base  of  first  two  fingers  on  the  ball. 


B,     First  two  fingers  oflF  the  ball. 


C.     First  three  fingers  off  the  ball. 


THE  PITCHER  37 

covering  first  and  receiving  the  ball  from  the 
infielders.  The  fact  that  the  pitcher  will  cover 
first  base  allows  the  first-baseman  to  cover  a  great 
deal  of  ground.  On  bunts  between  pitcher  and 
first-baseman  both  players  should  be  sure  that 
either  one  or  the  other  gets  the  ball,  the  other  one 
covering.  In  this  play  if  the  pitcher  gets  the  ball, 
he  can  either  make  the  put-out  himself,  or  toss 
the  ball  to  whoever  is  covering  first  base — either 
the  second-baseman  or  first-baseman.  If  the 
pitcher  is  unable  to  get  the  bunted  ball,  he  should 
continue  toward  first  base,  to  be  ready  to  cover 
that  base  if  it  is  necessary. 

In  fielding  the  ball  to  a  base  (with  men  on  bases) 
the  pitcher  should  always  listen  to  his  catcher, 
who  will  coach  him  where  to  throw  the  ball;  this 
practice  saves  the  pitcher  the  work  of  deciding  the 
play  himself — and  of  course  makes  it  fast. 

When,  with  second  base  occupied  by  a  runner, 
the  ball  is  hit  safely  to  the  outfield,  and  the  ball 
is  being  thrown  home  to  catch  the  man  who  is 
scoring  from  second,  the  pitcher  should  get  in  line 
with  the  throw  at  a  point  about  thirty  feet  in 
front  of  the  catcher.  (For  other  methods  of  mak- 
ing this  play  see  Diagrams  II  and  III,  pages  199 
and  200.)  Then  if  the  catcher  sees  that  he  cannot 
handle  the  ball  in  time  to  retire  the  runner,  he 
should  call  to  the  pitcher  to  intercept  it;  where- 


38  BASEBALL 

upon  the  pitcher  catches  it  and  throws  to  second 
— retiring  the  base-runner  there,  i.  e.,  the  batsman 
who  will  be  running  to  second  on  the  throw  to 
the  plate.  (As  to  when  to  play  when  ball  is  hit 
past  the  outfielders  see  Diagrams  IV,  V,  VI,  and 
VIII,  pages  200,  201,  and  202.) 

After  a  hit  to  an  infielder,  it  is  unnecessary  to 
cross  the  line  between  the  runner  and  first  base. 
The  pitcher  in  so  doing  merely  uses  up  energy 
that  should  be  reserved  for  pitching.  If  the  ball 
is  thrown  poorly,  the  first-baseman  will  get  it 
almost  as  quickly  as  the  pitcher  can.  Indeed,  in 
crossing  the  line,  the  pitcher  is  increasing  the 
runner's  chances  of  reaching  first  base;  for  if  the 
pitcher  blocks  the  runner  in  any  way,  the  runner 
is  entitled  to  first  base.  The  runner  knows,  or 
should  know,  this,  and  is  probably  making  every 
effort  to  come  in  contact  with  the  pitcher. 

The  pitcher  should  cover  home-base  on  all  plays 
that  take  the  catcher  away  from  his  position — 
such  as  foul  flies,  wild  pitches,  etc.  (See  also 
Diagram  VIII,  page  202.) 

On  short  foul  flies,  the  pitcher  should  coach 
his  catcher;  a  sharp  word  of  direction  here  will 
often  help  the  catcher  to  find  the  ball. 

The  pitcher  should  back  up  third  base  on  long 
hits  (especially  right-field  hits) — not  ten  feet 
behind  the  base,  where  the  ball  can  bound  off 


THE  PITCHER  39 

the  baseman's  glove  over  the  pitcher's  head,  but 
fifty  feet  behind  him,  so  as  to  be  able  to  cover 
ground  to  the  right  or  left. 

The  pitcher  should  never  find  himself  standing 
in  the  middle  of  the  diamond  doing  nothing  while 
a  play  is  going  on;  rather  back  up  some  place — 
give  directions,  or  cover  a  base — be  useful  * 

Working  with  His  Catcher 

A  young  pitcher  should  rely  upon  the  judgment 
of  his  catcher  in  the  matter  of  kind  of  balls  to 
throw,  especially  if  the  catcher  is  one  of  expe- 
rience and  has  knowledge  of  the  batters'  weak- 
nesses. But  when  the  pitcher  has  had  an  equal 
amount  of  experience,  it  is  a  good  plan  for  him 
at  times  to  use  his  own  judgment,  since  he  knows 
better  than  any  one  else  the  condition  of  his  arm, 
and  what  control  he  has  of  certain  balls.  Instead 
of  shaking  his  head  when  he  disagrees  with  the 
catcher,  the  pitcher  should  have  some  other  sign 
whereby  he  can  tell  his  catcher  to  call  another 
ball:  such  as  rubbing  his  shirt  or  tossing  the  ball 
up  in  the  air.  It  is  a  good  plan  to  talk  things  over 
frequently  with  the  catcher;  make  note  of  the 
batters — their  strong  and  weak  points,  etc. 

Two  heads  are  better  than  one;  therefore  think 
with  your  catcher! 


40  BASEBALL 


The  Pitcher's  Motion 

When  there  is  no  one  on  base,  the  pitcher  can  use 
a  slow  motion  of  the  arm  before  throwing  the  balL 
He  should  acquire  a  long,  continuous  motion  of  the 
arm,  bringing  the  back  into  play  by  leaning  as  far 
forward  as  possible  in  delivering  the  ball.  The 
motion  may  be  started  as  slowly  as  desired,  but 
when  the  arm  starts  finally  upward  and  forward. 
Its  motion  should  be  accelerated,  giving  snap  and 
vim  to  the  delivery — letting  the  ball  go  when  the 
body  and  arm  are  extended  as  far  as  possible  to- 
ward the  batter. 

Avoid  using,  regularly,  any  jerky,  half-continu- 
ous motions — as  they  are  hard  on  the  arm.  Spare 
the  elbow  as  much  as  is  possible — that  is,  make 
your  regular  pitching  motion  with  a  full-arm 
swing,  rather  than  a  bent-arm  snap. 

When  a  base-runner  is  Hable  to  steal,  all  wind-up 
motions  should  be  discontinued — all  preliminary 
motions  used  regularly  in  throwing  to  the  batter 
must  be  stopped.  Face  the  batter  and  extend  the 
left  foot  if  you  are  right-handed;  if  you  are  left- 
handed  extend  the  right.  In  this  position  you  will 
be  ready  to  deHver  the  ball  to  the  batter  with 
the  least  possible  loss  of  time.  Very  frequently 
catchers  are  blamed  for  allowing  men  to  steal  bases, 


THE  PITCHER  41 

when  in  reality  it  is  the  pitcher's  fault,  since  he 
was  slow  in  making  his  delivery. 

Throwing  to  Bases 

One  of  the  tests  of  a  good  pitcher  is  the  way  he 
keeps  the  runners  close  to  the  bases.  Pitchers 
should  put  a  great  deal  of  time  in  practising  the 
act  of  holding  base-runners  close  to  their  bases. 
It  is  a  very  common  thing  to  see  pitchers  lose  all 
control  of  the  ball  when  there  are  men  on  bases. 
This  is  due  almost  entirely  to  the  fact  that  the 
pitchers  cannot  use  their  long  preliminary  mo- 
tion before  throwing.  It  is  a  good  plan  in  the 
early-spring  play  to  practise  on  imaginary  runners 
while  pitching  to  batters.  Look  at  the  runner 
and  then  make  the  hurried  delivery  to  the  batter. 
Constant  work  at  this  will  enable  the  pitcher  to 
keep  his  control,  speed,  and  curves. 

To  prevent  having  bases  stolen  on  you,  avoid 
all  preliminary  (unconscious)  motions,  such  as 
shifting  the  feet,  dropping  or  raising  the  shoulders, 
bending  the  knees,  or  twitching  the  hips,  unless 
you  take  advantage  of  them  to  help  you  in  hold- 
ing base-runners  close  to  their  bases.  In  other 
words,  do  not  get  into  the  habit  of  working  auto- 
matically; e.  g.,  hunching  the  shoulder  every  time 
before  throwing  to  the  batter,  and  using  another 
motion  regularly  before  throwing  to  a  base.   If  you 


42  BASEBALL 

hunch  your  shoulder  regularly,  before  throwing 
to  the  batter,  hunch  your  shoulder  occasionally 
and  then  throw  to  a  base.  (This  is  taking  ad- 
vantage of  any  peculiarity  of  motion  that  you  may 
have.)  Do  everything  possible  to  prevent  the 
base-runner  from  getting  a  running  start  on  you. 
If  you  can  perfect  a  deceptive  delivery,  do  so.  If 
the  runner  has  a  big  lead  ofF  first,  toss  a  few  slow 
ones  over  to  get  him;  then  whirl  and  with  all  pos- 
sible speed  snap  the  ball  low  and  on  the  inside  cor- 
ner of  the  base.  Avoid  throwing  to  first  base 
unnecessarily.  Base-runners  often  tire  the  pitcher 
by  playing  off  so  far  that  many  throws  are  made 
to  catch  them — obtaining  base  on  balls  for  the 
batter.  In  fact,  the  chief  reason  for  throwing  to 
first  is  not  to  catch  the  runner  off  the  base  but  to 
hold  him  on,  often  outguessing  him  when  he  is 
about  to  steal. 

When  the  batter  has  one  ball  and  no  strike, 
two  balls  and  no  strike,  three  balls  and  one  or  two 
strikes,  then  the  pitcher  should  throw  to  first  base. 
For  in  these  conditions  the  pitcher  is  at  a  disadvan- 
tage {is  in  the  hole),  and  the  runner  may  be  get- 
ting a  start  on  a  clean  steal,  or  the  hit-and-run 
play.  (See  Team  Play  22.)  So  try  to  catch  him 
leaning  toward  second.  (Nine  times  out  of  ten 
the  base-runner,  if  he  has  the  hit-and-run  signal, 
or  intends  to  steal,  will  be  "hunching"  toward 


THE  PITCHER  43 

second.)  Practise  watching  the  runner  out  of  the 
corner  of  your  eye.  This  will  often  help  in  de- 
ciding whether  the  throw  to  first  is  necessary. 

In  throwing  to  first  base,  a  right-handed  pitcher 
can  use  a  signal  with  his  third-baseman. 

Runner  on  First  Base 

When  nobody  is  out  and  there  is  a  man  on 
first  base,  if  the  pitcher  expects  the  batter  to 
bunt,  he  should  throw  that  ball  which  is  hardest 
to  bunt,  namely,  the  high,  fast  ball;  then  he  should 
be  ready  to  field  the  ball  and  throw  it  either  to 
first  or  second,  according  to  the  catcher's  direc- 
tions. 

When  there  is  a  man  on  first  base  and  one  outy 
the  pitcher  should  be  ready  for  a  clean  steal — or 
the  "hit-and-run"  play. 

Man  on  Second 

The  pitcher  can  hold  the  runner  close  to  second 
base  by  working  with  a  signal  from  his  catcher — 
whereby  the  catcher  signals  to  the  baseman  and 
pitcher  at  the  same  time,  the  latter  turning  and 
making  the  throw  to  second  without  first  looking. 
(See  Team  Play  14.)  Or  he  may  work  with  his 
short-stop  or  second-baseman — using,  as  signal  to 
throw,  a  nod  of  the  head,  closing  of  the  hand, 
or  some  other  simple  movement. 


44  BASEBALL 

It  takes  time  to  perfect  this  sudden  turn  and 
throw  to  second  base;  therefore  the  pitcher  should 
practise  it  constantly  until  he  is  master  of  it:  a 
right-handed  pitcher  should  turn  to  the  left — a 
left-handed  pitcher  to  the  right.  He  should  not 
throw  directly  at  the  base,  but  a  foot  to  that  side 
of  it  nearest  the  baseman.  This  will  give  the 
baseman  time  to  catch  the  ball  and  retire  the  run- 
ner without  overrunning  the  base.  For  instance, 
if  the  short-stop  is  covering,  the  pitcher  should 
throw  the  ball  to  the  left-field  side  of  second  base 
— and  vice  versa  if  the  second-baseman  is  cover- 
ing— i.  e.y  on  the  right-field  side  of  second  base. 
This  play  will  catch  many  a  runner  napping. 

Whenever  the  short-stop  bluffs  the  base-run- 
ner back  toward  second  (without  any  signal  for 
a  throw  from  the  pitcher),  the  pitcher  should  be 
ready  to  make  his  delivery  to  the  batter.  For 
when  the  short-stop  starts  for  second,  the  runner 
will  do  the  same,  and  if  the  pitcher  delivers  the 
ball  to  the  batter,  the  runner  will  be  headed  back 
to  second — thus  being  prevented  from  stealing, 
and  slowed  up  on  scoring  in  case  of  a  hit. 

When  there  is  a  man  on  second — and  none  out — 
if  the  pitcher  expects  a  bunt,  occasionally,  as 
the  short-stop  runs  the  man  back  to  second,  he 
can  put  the  ball  right  over  the  base,  that  it  may 
be  bunted — and  then  he  can  run  in,  get  the  ball, 


THE  PITCHER  45 

and  retire  the  man  at  third — ^working  with  the 
first-baseman,  who  also  comes  in. 

Since  the  pitcher  is  allowed  to  make  motions 
to  second  without  throwing  the  ball  there,  it  is 
a  good  plan  to  develop  some  slight  motion  toward 
second  to  drive  the  runner  back  to  that  base 
before  deHvering  the  ball  to  the  batter.  This 
motion  need  be  nothing  more  than  a  quick  look 
at  second  while  drawing  the  arm  back  to  throw 
to  the  batter. 

When  there  is  a  man  on  second — the  pitcher 
should  help  the  third-baseman  by  going  sharply 
after  balls  to  the  right — and  retiring  the  man  at 
third.  Otherwise,  if  the  third-baseman  has  to 
field  them,  third  base  is  generally  left  unprotected 
and  the  runner  reaches  there  safely  from  second. 

Runner  on  Second 

When  there  is  a  man  on  second  base  and  the 
ball  is  hit  sharply  to  you,  there  are  three  ways  in 
which  you  can  play  the  man  on  second.  One  is 
to  drive  him  back  to  second  by  a  quick  motion — 
then  whirling  and  throwing  the  batter  out  at  first. 
Another  play  occurs  when,  as  you  turn  toward 
second,  the  runner  stops  between  second  and 
third — your  play  here  is  to  run  directly  toward 
him — preferably  driving  him  back  toward  second 
and   making  the   "put-out"   there.      The  other 


46  BASEBALL 

play  is  to  throw  to  third  if  the  runner  attempts 
to  go  to  that  base  when  the  ball  is  hit  to  you. 

Always  remember  what  bases  are  occupied  and  by 
whom,  and  how  many  are  out! 

Runner  on  Third 

One  or  none  out.  When  there  is  a  man  on 
third — and  the  ball  is  hit  sharply  to  you — ^you 
should  retire  the  runner  on  third  when  it  is  possi- 
ble, or  drive  him  back  to  third  before  throwing 
the  batter  out  at  first. 

Runner  on  First  and  Third 

If  the  man  on  first  starts  for  second  on  your 
delivery,  be  prepared  to  receive  the  ball  from  the 
catcher.  If  he  does  throw  the  ball  at  you,  catch 
it — and  be  ready  to  throw  it  home  instantly  (if 
the  runner  is  scoring);  or  if  you  can't  play  the 
man  on  third — ^whirl  and  throw  to  second;  fre- 
quently you  can  catch  the  man  coming  from 
first.  This  play  to  be  successful  demands  in- 
stantaneous action — and  accurate  and  speedy 
throwing.  (A  great  deal  of  practice  is  necessary 
before  the  average  pitcher  can  handle  this  fast 
ball  and  make  the  play  correctly.) 

Runner  on  First  and  Third 

If,  while  you  have  the  ball  in  your  hand,  the 
man  on  first  starts  for  second,  whirl  immediately. 


THE  PITCHER  47 

turning  toward  third  base,  and  noting  what  the 
runner  there  is  doing.  He  may  be  starting  for 
home  as  the  runner  leaves  first — or  he  may  be 
playing  off  the  base  ready  to  go  home  as  you 
throw  to  second.  So  drive  the  man  back  to 
third,  and  snap  the  ball  to  second.  If  you  can 
catch  the  runner  off  third,  do  so. 

Breaking  up  the  Squeeze  Play 

Runner  on  third,  {Second  and  third — or  firsts 
second,  and  third.)  In  any  of  these  positions 
the  pitcher  should  watch  for  an  attempted 
"squeeze  play"  and  be  prepared  to  break  it  up. 
(See  Team  Play  23.)  In  order  to  do  this,  take 
your  wind-up  motion  slowly — all  the  while  watch- 
ing the  runner  on  third  base.  Often  he  will  start 
for  home  before  you  have  begun  the  final  motion 
in  delivering  the  ball.  In  this  case,  if  the  fast  ball 
is  called,  you  can  either  throw  the  ball  high  and 
wide  (out  of  the  batter's  reach)  or  directly  over 
the  batter's  head.  In  the  former  case,  he  will 
usually  be  unable  to  bunt  safely;  in  the  latter,  he 
will  think  only  of  getting  out  of  the  way  of  the 
ball.  If  the  curve  is  called,  break  it  wide — out  of 
the  batter's  reach. 


48  BASEBALL 

A  Few  General  Pitching  Hints 

The  most  successful  curve  is  the  out-drop,  be- 
cause it  curves  outward  and  downward;  and 
therefore  is  difficult  to  hit  squarely. 

The  slow  ball  is  something  every  pitcher  should 
have  if  he  would  be  successful.  Nothing  worries 
a  good  batter  so  much  as  to  face  a  pitcher  who 
is  known  to  have  a  good  slow  ball  to  mix  with  his 
fast  one.  Remember,  however,  to  use  the  slow 
ball  very  seldom  against  a  weak  hitter;  it  is  the 
good  hitter  against  whom  it  works  most  suc- 
cessfully. 

The  slow  ball  is  the  most  difficult  of  all  deliv- 
eries to  master,  but  its  effectiveness  is  well  worth 
any  amount  of  time  spent  on  it.  This  ball  is 
most  difficult  to  hit  when  thrown  across  the  base 
in  the  neighborhood  of  the  batter's  knees;  then 
there  is  a  tendency  for  the  batter  to  hit  on  top  of 
it,  driving  it  weakly  on  the  ground.  It  is  only 
after  a  careful  study  of  the  batters  that  the  pitcher 
can  know  when  to  use  the  slow  ball.  Usually 
batters  who  take  long  swings  at  the  ball  have  diffi- 
culty in  hitting  it. 

Pitching,  from  beginning  to  end,  involves  the 
pitcher  and  the  batter  in  a  battle  of  wits.  The 
pitcher  should  so  vary  the  kind  of  balls  he  throws 
that  the  batter  cannot  guess  successfully  what  is 


THE  PITCHER  49 

coming.  A  thoughtful  batter,  knowing  that  the 
pitcher  has  a  good  assortment,  will  generally  ex- 
pect diflferent  kinds  of  balls  to  be  thrown.  The 
pitcher,  therefore,  may  at  times  throw  three  fast 
balls  or  three  curves  in  succession;  thereby  out- 
witting the  batter.  Or  he  may  use  other  com- 
binations; such  as  an  alternation  of  fast  ball 
and  curve;  or  two  fast  balls  and  a  slow  ball;  or 
two  curves  and  a  fast  ball;  or  two  curves  and  a 
slow  ball — anything  to  prevent  the  batters  from 
discovering  regularity  in  the  pitcher's  delivery. 

A  good  pitcher  will  always  try  to  put  the.batter 
"in  the  hole";  that  is,  at  the  disadvantage  of  hav- 
ing more  strikes  than  balls  against  him.  Then 
the  pitcher  can  afford  to  make  the  batter  hit  at 
balls  that  are  not  good.  Here  again,  however, 
the  pitcher  may  outwit  the  batter  by  throwing  a 
perfectly  good  strike  when  the  latter  is  expect- 
ing a  curve  or  other  ball  away  from  the  plate. 
This  is  called  "slipping  one  over." 

Do  not  be  afraid  to  give  a  batter  four  balls,  if 
by  doing  so  (without  forcing  in  a  run)  you  can  get 
rid  of  a  good  hitter  to  bring  up  a  poor  one.  In 
fact,  this  is  sometimes  the  best  thing  to  do,  if  the 
batter  has  the  advantage  in  balls  and  strikes,  when 
the  man  who  would  make  the  winning  run  is  on 
second  or  third.  In  this  case,  make  the  batter 
hit  a  bad  ball,  or  give  him  a  base  on  balls;  then 


50  BASEBALL 

work  hard  to  get  the  advantage  over  the  next 
batter,  preventing  him  from  hitting  safely. 

If  you  find  that  you  are  having  trouble  con- 
trolling the  ball  from  your  regular  place  on  the 
rubber,  shift  your  feet  a  little  to  either  side.  This 
may  help  you  to  regain  your  control. 

If  your  fast  ball  persists  in  carrying  in  close  to 
the  batter,  move  your  catcher  out  a  bit. 

The  moist  ball  (or  spit-ball)  is  one  of  the  late 
innovations  into  the  game,  and  has  helped  to  in- 
sure many  a  pitcher  who  is  without  a  good  curve 
ball  his  position  on  the  team.  Many  pitchers 
use  this  ball,  but  few  of  them  rank  as  first  class. 
If  you  are  fortunate  enough  to  possess  spe.ed  and 
good  curves,  avoid  using  the  moist  ball,  as  it  is 
very  hard  on  the  arm  (and  the  majority  of  clubs 
prefer  the  other  class  of  pitchers). 

Work  especially  hard  to  retire  the  first  batter 
every  inning. 

Remember  what  bases  are  occupied  by  runners, 
and  who  these  runners  are — whether  they  are 
fast  or  slow.  This  will  help  you  in  deciding  where 
to  play  the  ball  if  it  is  hit  to  you. 

Do  not  get  yourself  into  difficulty  by  throwing 
balls  to  the  batter — your  infield  and  outfield  are 
there  to  help  you;  and  they  would  much  rather 
see  the  opposing  team  hit  the  ball  than  walk  to 
first  base. 


THE  PITCHER  51 

Inspire  your  team  by  your  actions  of  confidence 
and  judgment;  then  they  will  work  harder  and 
better  behind  you.  Figure  every  possibility  as 
the  batter  takes  his  position  in  the  box. 

If  your  men  are  making  errors  behind  you,  do 
not  become  discouraged  or  show  resentment;  this 
is  a  time  when  you  must  control  yourself  and  the 
ball  in  such  a  way  as  to  pull  your  team  together. 
A  team  cannot  win  consistently  if  its  pitchers 
lack  courage;  therefore,  when  you  take  your  posi- 
tion on  the  mound,  resolve  that,  no  matter  how 
great  the  odds  may  be  against  you,  you  will  never 
lose  your  nerve. 

Pay  no  attention  to  remarks  addressed  to  you 
by  the  opposing  players  or  the  spectators;  they 
are  likely  to  say  various  things  merely  to  discon- 
cert you.  You  must  remain  cool  and  thoughtful 
all  through  the  game,  no  matter  how  wild  the 
excitement  may  run  among  the  spectators. 

Before  pitching  to  each  batter,  be  sure  that 
your  fielders  are  all  placed  properly. 

Do  not  become  careless  when  there  is  a  weak 
hitter  at  bat;  he  wouldn't  be  in  the  ball  game  if 
he  couldn't  hit  at  times. 

If  any  unusual  delay  occurs  while  the  game  is 
in  progress,  do  not  stand  idly  by.  Select  your 
first-baseman  or  any  other  handy  player,  and 
throw  the  ball  to  him,  thereby  keeping  your  arm 
warm  until  the  game  is  resumed. 


52  BASEBALL 

Toward  the  end  of  the  game,  when  you  are 
ahead — no  matter  how  much — do  not  assume 
that  the  game  is  won  and  become  careless.  Con- 
tinue to  use  your  head,  and  control  the  ball. 

Do  not  be  unwilling  to  take  advice  from  your 
fellow  players  during  the  game  or  at  any  other 
time.     Many  heads  are  better  than  one. 

A  little  plaster  of  Paris  powder,  or  powdered 
chalk,  carried  in  the  hip  pocket,  may  come  in 
handy  on  wet  days  to  rub  on  the  ball. 

Remember  that,  to  be  at  your  best  and  to  have 
a  long  Hfe  in  baseball,  you  must  keep  good  hours 
and  avoid  all  excesses. 


Ill 

THE  FIRST-BASEMAN 

Footwork 

Accustom  the  feet  to  feel  for  the  base.  Be- 
fore receiving  a  thrown  ball,  stand  just  inside  of 
the  diamond  with  feet  spread  on  each  side  of  the 
base;  then  when  the  ball  is  thrown,  shift  in  the 
direction  of  the  ball.  If  it  comes  to  the  right, 
extend  the  right  foot — hooking  the  base  with  the 
left;  if  it  comes  to  the  left,  extend  the  left  foot 
— hooking  the  base  with  the  right.  Practise  this 
constantly. 

The  first-baseman  should  never  cross  his  feet; 
that  is,  extend  the  left  foot  when  reaching  to  the 
right,  and  vice  versa.  (See  illustration  facing 
page  54.)  By  so  doing,  the  reach  is  shortened 
and  the  position  is  made  very  awkward. 

Never  remain  on  the  base  when  the  ball  has 
been  thrown  too  wide  to  be  handled.  You  can 
do  nothing  without  the  ball;  therefore,  leave  the 
base  and  take  a  chance  on  touching  the  runner 
or  getting  back  to  the  base  ahead  of  him. 

In  handling  low-thrown  balls  (pick-ups),  the 
first-baseman  should  reach  forward  as  far  as  pos- 

53 


54  BASEBALL 

sible,  keeping  one  foot  against  the  base,  trusting 
that  if  the  ball  gets  away  from  his  hands  it  will 
be  blocked  by  his  body.  Keeping  the  foot  against 
the  base  and  judging  how  far  you  can  reach  re- 
quires a  great  deal  of  practice.  Do  not  turn  the 
head  away  from  the  ball,  for  in  so  doing  it  is  im- 
possible to  follow  the  bound. 

Working  with  the  Pitcher 

The  success  of  a  first-baseman  depends  to  a 
great  extent  upon  the  amount  of  ground  he  can 
cover.  And  in  order  that  he  may  cover  ground, 
he  must  know  that  the  pitcher  is  ready  at  all  times 
to  go  to  first  base.  The  first-baseman  should  con- 
stantly coach  the  pitcher  to  take  the  base  on  all  balls 
hit  to  the  first-baseman.  Knowing  that  the  pitcher 
will  take  first,  he  can  play  well  back  and  cover 
ground  to  the  right  and  left. 

In  making  a  play  to  first  base  when  the  pitcher 
is  covering  that  base,  it  is  absolutely  necessary 
to  toss  the  ball  to  him.  Keep  the  ball  well  in 
the  air  and  ahead  of  the  pitcher  as  he  runs  to 
the  base — this  enables  him  to  get  the  location 
of  the  base  and  catch  the  ball  at  the  same  time 
— all  the  while  going  at  full  speed.  A  fast  thrown 
ball,  on  this  play,  either  gets  away  from  the 
pitcher  because  he  hasn't  time  to  cover  it,  if  it  is 
over  the  base,  or  it  slows  him  up,  since  he  has  to 


THE  FIRST-BASEMAN  55 

stop  in  order  to  catch  the  ball.  When  it  is  pos- 
sible, toss  the  ball  so  that  the  pitcher  receives  it 
just  before  reaching  the  base. 

Catching  Thrown  Balls 

The  first-baseman  should  be  adept  at  catching 
the  ball  with  the  gloved  hand  alone,  as  well  as 
with  both  hands.  He  is  constantly  being  forced 
to  handle  bad  throws,  and  since  he  can  reach  much 
farther  with  one  hand  than  he  can  with  two,  it 
is  essential  that  he  cling  to  the  ball  whenever  he 
gets  one  hand  on  it.  Practise  catching  with  the 
gloved  hand  alone.  But  never  use  one  hand  when 
you  can  get  both  on  the  ball ! 

When  there  is  a  fast  man  coming  down  the  base- 
line from  home,  stretch  out  as  far  as  you  can  to 
meet  the  ball;  by  so  doing,  you  will  receive  the 
ball  sooner.  Many  base-runners  who  otherwise 
would  be  safe  are  declared  out  when  the  play  is 
made  this  way. 

It  is  well  to  get  into  the  habit  in  practice  of  call- 
ing for  the  ball  on  the  inside  of  the  diamond  out 
of  the  path  of  the  runner.  But  a  first-baseman 
should  not  be  afraid  of  reaching  right  in  front  of  a 
base-runner  to  get  the  ball;  then,  no  matter  what 
happens — hold  the  ball ! 

After  receiving  a  thrown  ball  from  the  infield, 
the   first-baseman  should    instantly  shift    into  a 


56  BASEBALL 

throwing  position — watching  the  other  base-run- 
ners. A  second  lost  will  often  enable  a  clever  base- 
runner  to  steal  a  base. 

Tagging  the  Runner 

The  first-baseman  should  develop  a  sharp,  swift 
motion  in  putting  the  ball  on  the  runner  as 
he  comes  back  to  the  base.  Always  reach  low — 
and  sweep  the  ball  on  the  runner  just  in  front  of 
the  base.  When  it  is  possible,  especially  with  a 
runner  caught  between  first  base  and  second  base, 
meet  the  runner  a  few  feet  from  the  base,  but  be 
sure  he  can't  slide  under  the  ball.  Do  not  try 
to  pound  the  runner  hard  with  the  ball — the  ball 
might  bound  out  of  your  hands — a  swift,  light 
touch  takes  less  time  and  is  safer. 

The  Question  of  Choosing  a  Right  or  Left 
Handed  Thrower 

In  only  one  particular  has  a  left-handed  first 
baseman  the  advantage  over  a  right-handed  man; 
and  that  is  in  throwing  to  second  base  to  make 
double  plays.  When  he  gets  the  ball  he  is  in  a 
natural  position  to  throw  to  second  base;  while  the 
right-handed  man  is  compelled  to  make  almost  a 
complete  turn  before  he  is  in  a  position  to  throw  to 
that  base.     Therefore,  other  things  being  equal, 


THE  FIRST-BASEMAN  57 

the  first  consideration  governing  the  choice  would 
be  the  players*  batting  ability. 

Fielding  the  Position 

The  distance  from  first  base  that  the  fielder 
should  play  can  only  be  determined  by  the  indi- 
vidual himself.  The  rule  is  to  cover  as  much 
ground  as  possible — safely.  A  moderate  distance 
when  playing  back — to  be  varied  by  the  ability  of 
the  individual  player — is  a  position  eight  paces 
from  the  base  along  the  base-line,  and  eight  paces 
perpendicularly  back.  (See  Diagram  IX,  page 
203.)  On  natural  right-field  hitters,  play  over 
toward  the  foul  line — as  hits  in  that  territory  are 
generally  good  for  two  bases.  On  all  other  bat- 
ters, take  your  regular  position — playing  as  far 
outside  of  the  diamond  as  possible  (that  is,  of 
course,  when  you  are  not  holding  the  runner  on 
the  base). 

The  first-baseman  should  perfect  himself  in 
handling  batted  ground  balls;  he  should  be  sure 
at  least  to  get  his  body  in  front  of  the  ball  and 
block  it — trusting  to  be  able  to  pick  the  ball  up 
and  beat  the  runner  to  the  base — or  that  the 
pitcher  will  run  over  and  cover  first.  On  slow 
balls,  he  should  run  in  swiftly,  get  the  ball  (with 
one  hand  if  necessary),  whirl,  and  snap  it  to  first — 
always  remembering  to  tell  the  pitcher  to  take 


58  BASEBALL 

first  base.  If  the  ball  is  one  which  both  the  pitcher 
and  first-baseman  try  for — of  course  the  second- 
baseman  should  go  to  first  base — short-stop  nat- 
urally swinging  over  to  cover  second  base,  there 
being  nothing  else  for  him  to  do.  The  first-base- 
man should  try  to  get  all  fly  balls  in  his  vicinity — 
especially  those  between  him  and  the  catcher — as 
he  gets  a  better  start  after  the  ball,  knowing  just 
where  it  is,  while  the  catcher  pauses  momentarily 
to  locate  it.  (This  is  especially  true  if  the  sun  is 
in  the  catcher's  eyes.)  It  is  generally  safer  for 
the  first-baseman  to  take  fly  balls  that  come  down 
on  his  side  of  the  diamond  near  the  pitcher.  It 
is  well  not  to  go  over  very  far  toward  the  second- 
baseman — as  he  generally  has  an  easy  time  cover- 
ing ground  on  fly  balls;  but  the  first-baseman 
should  start  fast  and  try  for  all  pop-flies  out  in 
right  field  behind  him.  (See  "Second-Baseman" 
on  fly  balls.) 

In  taking  your  position  in  the  field,  always  be 
sure  that  the  base  is  inside  the  diamond,  for  if  any 
part  of  it  is  hit  while  on  foul  ground,  the  hit  is  fair . 

Backing  up  Bases 

When  the  ball  is  being  thrown  home  from  the 
outfield,  the  first  baseman  can  play  in  either  of 
the  two  ways  indicated  in  Diagram  II,  page  199. 
He  should  get  back  of  the  catcher  at  a  distance  of 


THE  FIRST-BASEMAN  59 

forty  feet — alert  and  ready  to  stop  overthrows, 
etc. — returning  the  ball  to  the  infield  wherever  the 
play  demands  it  or  take  a  position  in  the  infield. 
(See  Diagrams  IV,  V,  VI  and  VII,  pages  200-202.) 

Runner  on  First  Base 

When  there  is  a  runner  on  first  base  only,  the 
first-baseman  should  always  remain  on  his  base 
to  prevent  the  runner  from  getting  a  large  lead. 
(There  is  one  exception  to  this  rule,  viz.:  In  the 
last  inning,  if  his  side  is  three  or  more  runs  ahead, 
the  first-baseman  should  leave  his  base  and  play 
back,  paying  attention  only  to  the  batter,  as  the 
one  run  won't  affect  the  score  materially.) 

Stand  over  the  base,  feet  astride,  giving  the 
runner  room  to  slide  back  to  the  base  behind  your 
right  foot.  Be  on  the  alert  for  a  throw  from  the 
pitcher.     Always  watch  the  ball. 

None  out.  Be  ready  to  handle  a  bunted  ball. 
(The  batter  may  bunt  according  to  Team  Plays  19 
ay  b,  c.) 

If  the  ball  is  bunted,  go  in  toward  the  batter 
with  all  possible  speed.  Start  the  instant  you 
divine  that  he  will  bunt.  (By  watching  closely 
the  arm  motions  of  the  batter,  you  can  frequently 
tell  when  he  is  about  to  bunt.)  If  it  is  a  slow 
bunt,  play  the  ball  to  first  base,  as  it  will  be  im- 
possible to  retire  the  runner  at  second.     But  if  it 


6o  BASEBALL 

is  a  ball  that  comes  at  you  rather  fast,  whirl  and 
head  the  man  off  at  second. 

On  balls  other  than  bunts,  also  use  your  judg- 
ment in  playing  the  ball.  If  you  think  that  you 
have  time  to  get  the  runner  at  second,  throw  the 
ball  there — otherwise  play  it  to  first  base.  (A 
word  from  one  of  your  own  players  will  often 
help  you  in  deciding  this  play.)  Always  keep 
in  mind  the  speed  of  the  batter  and  base-run- 
ner. 

One  out.  Hold  the  runner  close  to  the  base  to 
prevent  him  from  getting  a  start.  Here  he  may 
be  going  to  attempt  to  steal,  or  work  the  hit-and- 
run  play.  You  may,  therefore,  expect  frequent 
throws  from  the  pitcher,  who  should  be  working 
to  break  up  any  contemplated  play. 

As  the  pitcher  delivers  the  ball  to  the  batter, 
go  out  into  the  diamond  to  cover  more  ground. 
It  is  necessary  to  remain  on  the  base  only  as  long 
as  the  pitcher  might  throw  there;  after  that, 
leave  the  base  and  go  out  where  you  can  be  of 
service  fielding  the  ball. 

When  the  ball  is  hit  to  you,  if  possible,  retire 
the  runner  going  to  second  base  (starting  a  double 
play);  then  go  back  to  your  base  to  complete  the 
play.  (The  act  of  making  the  double  play  suc- 
cessfully requires  great  speed  and  accuracy; 
therefore,  you  should  spend  much  time  in  prac- 


THE  FIRST-BASEMAN  6i 

tising  it.)  If  the  runner  going  to  second  is  out 
of  the  question,  retire  the  runner  at  first — either 
by  playing  him  yourself  or  by  tossing  the  ball 
to  the  pitcher  or  second-baseman,  who  may  be 
covering  the  base. 

Whenever  the  base-runner  starts  to  steal,  the 
first-baseman  should  call  out  to  his  catcher, 
"There  he  goes!'*  (or  some  other  similar  direc- 
tion). This  will  enable  the  catcher  to  keep  his  eye 
on  second  base  while  throwing — instead  of  being 
compelled  to  watch  the  runner. 

Two  out.  Hold  the  runner  up;  and  play  to  re- 
tire the  batter  at  first  base. 

Runners  on  First  and  Second 

See  Team  Play  13. 

When  one  is  out,  play  half  your  regular  distance 
back  of,  and  away  from,  your  base.  The  fact 
that  you  do  this  will  enable  you  to  cover  more 
ground  and  will  not  permit  the  runner  to  take 
any  larger  lead  than  if  you  were  on  the  base. 
If  he  persists  in  taking  a  large  lead,  you  can  fre- 
quently retire  him  by  a  throw  from  the  catcher. 
(See  Team  Play  17.) 

When  two  are  out,  leave  your  base,  and  play 
your  regular  distance  back — ^just  as  though  there 
were  no  runner  on  base.  The  pitcher  will  cover 
first  base  on  all  balls  hit  to  you.    The  fact  that 


62  BASEBALL 

second  base  is  occupied  prevents  the  base-runner 
from  stealing.  (As  a  rule,  they  won't  attempt  a 
double  steal  when  two  are  out.)  If  the  runner 
takes  a  large  lead,  drive  him  back  by  the  use  of 
Team  Play  17. 

Runners  on  First,  Second,  and  Third 
See  Team  Plays  i,  2,  3,  4,  5. 

Runners  on  First  and  Third 
See  Team  Plays  6,  7,  8,  9. 

Runners  on  Second  and  Third ^ 
See  Team  Plays  10  and  11. 

Runner  on  Third 

See  Team  Play  12. 

Always,  as  the  hatter  takes  his  position  in  the 
boXy  decide  what  you  will  do  with  the  ball  if  it  is  hit 
to  you! 


IV 

THE  SECOND-BASEMAN 
General  Fielding  Hints 

Your  regular  position  should  be  as  far  back  and 
away  from  second  base  as  your  speed  and  general 
ability  will  permit.  This  position  should  also  be 
determined  in  connection  with  the  batter's  speed, 
hitting  ability,  etc.  (See  Diagrams  IX,  X,  and 
XI,  pages  203  and  204.) 

On  all  fly  balls  hit  into  your  territory,  start 
for  them  immediately,  calling  out  as  you  start 
(this  will  prevent  collisions  with  other  fielders). 
Learn  by  practice  how  much  ground  you  can 
cover  toward  centre  field,  right  field,  and  behind 
the  first-baseman  toward  the  foul-line. 

Always  judge  the  wind!  If  it  is  blowing  out 
with  the  ball,  your  opportunity  of  catching  the 
ball  is  decreased;  while  if  it  is  blowing  in  from  the 
outfield,  against  the  ball,  and,  as  it  were,  holding 
the  ball  up,  you  will  be  greatly  assisted  in  covering 
ground  and  catching  the  ball.  Remember,  there- 
fore, to  ascertain  when  you  take  your  position  on 
the  field  just  how  the  wind  blows.     Of  course, 

63 


04  BASEBALL 

nothing  can  be  done  with  that  "thorn  in  the  side," 
The  Texas  Leaguer — (a  Httle  fly  ball  just  out  of 
reach  of  both  outfielders  and  infielders). 

On  a  base-hit  to  right  field,  don't  chase  the  ball 
out  into  the  field — the  right-fielder  can  handle  it; 
go  to  second  base  and  receive  the  ball  from  the 
fielder.  (The  short-stop  should  back  you  up  on 
this  play.)  On  a  base-hit  to  left  field,  back  up 
the  short-stop,  who  covers  second  on  the  throw-in. 

With  a  runner  on  second  base,  when  base-hits 
are  made  to  the  outfield,  play  as  directed  in 
Diagrams  II  and  III,  pages  199  and  200. 

On  long  hits  to  right  field  for  two  or  more  bases, 
in  which  it  is  necessary  to  relay  the  ball  in,  go  out 
into  the  field  and  back  up  the  fielder  who  is  to 
"make  the  throw"  into  the  diamond.  Coach 
this  man  where  to  throw  upon  receiving  the  ball. 
With  your  assistance  he  can  turn  and  throw  with- 
out a  second's  loss — and  this  often  means  the  pre- 
venting of  runs  being  made.  (Study  Diagrams 
VI  and  VII,  pages  201  and  202.) 

On  all  slow  hits,  go  in  fast,  and  throw  to  first 
base  underhanded ;  for  by  straightening  up  to 
throw  you  lose  time,  and  the  runner  may  beat 
your  throw  to  first  base — especially  if  he  is  a  fast 
runner  or  left-handed  batter.  (Left-handed  bat- 
ters always  get  away  from  the  plate  faster  than 
right-handed  men.)     On  some  left-handed  batters 


THE  SECONI>-BASEMAN  65 

— fast  men — you  will  be  compelled  to  play  in 
closer  to  protect  against  just  such  a  play.  Since, 
by  studying  the  batter,  you  will  know  his  speed 
and  peculiarities,  your  own  judgment  will  help 
you  a  great  deal  here. 

Hard-hit  halls  should  be  blocked  or  "knocked 
down."  Never  let  the  fumbling  of  such  a  ball 
worry  you,  for  the  ball  generally  hits  your  hands 
before  the  runner  is  fifteen  feet  from  the  plate. 
Recover  the  ball  as  quickly  as  possible  and  throw 
it  to  first  by  a  sharp,  underhanded  snap.  Never 
take  your  eye  of  a  fumbled  hall;  get  it  securely  in 
the  hand  before  attempting  to  throw  it.  In 
other  words,  dorit  look  at  the  hase-runner  while  try- 
ing to  pick  up  the  hall.  If  you  do,  you  will  find 
yourself  making  three  or  four  attempts  to  get 
hold  of  it — and  by  that  time  the  runner  will  be 
over  first  base.  As  you  can  do  nothing  without 
the  ball,  remember  to  keep  your  eyes  on  it  until 
you  have  it  in  your  hand. 

On  hits  that  you  field  close  to  first  hase,  toss  or 
pitch  the  ball  to  the  first-baseman;  he  can  handle 
this  kind  of  a  ball  better  than  one  snapped  hard 
at  him.  When  the  pitcher  is  covering  first  base, 
and  you  have  fielded  the  ball  near  him,  toss  the 
ball  to  him  in  the  same  way — for  he  will  be  com- 
pelled to  run,  catch  the  ball,  and  touch  the  base 
all  at  the  same  time.    The  conditions  of  making 


66  BASEBALL 

these  plays  should  be  governed  by  the  amount  of 
time  at  your  disposal,  the  speed  of  the  ball  and 
runner,  etc. 

Getting  the  Catcher's  Signals 

Be  sure  to  understand  and  get  the  catcher's 
signals  (see  catcher's  signals.  Team  Play  29), 
as  they  will  help  you  in  covering  ground  intelli- 
gently. For  instance:  let  us  assume  that  the 
catcher's  signal  to  the  pitcher  for  a  fast  ball  is 
one  finger,  and  for  a  curve  two  fingers — and 
that  there  is  a  right-handed  batter  who  is  a  free 
hitter  at  the  plate.  Now,  suppose  you  are  playing 
your  regular  position,  and  you  see  the  catcher 
put  down  one  finger — you  know  it  calls  for  a  fast 
ball — and  this  ball  will  very  probably  be  hit  in 
your  direction.  If,  however,  on  this  play  the 
batter  is  a  certain  left-field  hitter,  play  a  little 
closer  to  second  base — all  the  while  ready  to 
cover  ground  to  your  left  also.  And  on  a  free 
hitter,  if  the  catcher  should  put  down  two  fingers 
(calling  for  a  curve)  the  ball  will  more  than  likely 
be  hit  to  the  short-stop.  When  there  is  a  left- 
handed  batter  at  the  plate,  of  course  these  con- 
ditions of  play  would  be  just  reversed:  upon 
getting  the  catcher's  signals,  reverse  them,  i,  e., 
the  curved  ball  would  probably  be  hit  in  your 
direction,  and  the  fast  ball  to  the  left-field  side. 


THE  SECOND-BASEMAN  ^^ 

Yet  be  ready  to  cover  ground  toward  second  base 
on  the  fast-ball  signal.  After  you  have  got  the 
catcher's  signal,  do  not  shift  your  position  before 
the  ball  is  pitched,  as  that  would  inform  the  bats- 
man of  the  play;  you  may  expect  a  dead  right- 
field  hitter  to  hit  nearly  all  balls  in  your  direction. 

Passing  the  Catcher's  Signals  to  the 
Outfield 

The  second-baseman,  by  getting  the  catcher's 
signals,  can  not  only  increase  his  own  efficiency 
in  covering  ground  but  can  assist  the  outfielders 
by  passing  these  same  signals  out  to  them.  It  is 
easy  for  the  second-baseman  to  get  the  catcher's 
signs  (signals),  but  it  is  impossible  for  the  out- 
fielders to  get  them;  therefore  the  second-base- 
man should  pass  the  signals  out  to  the  fielders,  so 
that  they  can  know  whether  a  curve  or  a  fast  ball 
is  being  pitched. 

A  simple  method  of  doing  this  may  clarify  the 
point:  when  you  see  the  fast  ball  (one  finger) 
called  by  the  catcher,  place  the  right  hand  be- 
hind your  back  with  the  hand  closed;  when  the 
curved  ball  has  been  called  (two  fingers)  place 
the  right  hand  behind  your  back — open.  The 
same  hand  should  be  used  in  giving  these  signals, 
otherwise  the  opposing  batsmen  will  soon  be  able 
to   distinguish    between  signals — and  will  know 


68  BASEBALL 

what  ball  is  coming  each  time.  By  playing  ac- 
cording to  signals  in  this  way,  both  the  infield 
and  outfield  can  cover  more  ground — ^with  a 
greater  degree  of  certainty. 

Protecting  the  Weak  Side 

If  a  fielder  is  weak  on  covering  ground,  either  to 
the  right  or  left  side,  he  should  protect  that  side, 
e,  g.y  if  a  second-baseman  has  difficulty  fielding 
balls  on  his  right,  he  should  play  a  little  toward 
second  base.  However,  try  for  every  hit  ball  that 
comes  your  way — and  try  hard — don't  be  afraid  of 
making  errors.  All  good  fielders  (ground  coverers) 
make  errors,  because  they  "go  after  everything 
in  sight" — and  in  so  doing  they  knock  down  many 
balls  that  would  have  meant  runs.  Accustom 
yourself  to  using  the  gloved  hand  freely,  but  never 
use  one  hand  to  stop  or  catch  a  ball  if  tzvo  can  be 
used  to  do  the  same  work. 

When  There  Is  a  Runner  on  First  Base  and 
None  Out 

In  this  case  the  batter  may  bunt  the  ball.  (See 
Team  Plays  ig  a,  b,  c.)  The  second-baseman,  if 
he  assumes  that  the  batter  will  bunt,  should  take 
his  position  a  few  paces  back  of  the  base-line  and 
directly  between  the  first-baseman  and  pitcher. 
From  this  point  he  can  recover  any  hard-bunted 


THE  SECOND-BASEMAN  69 

balls  that  go  between  the  first-baseman  and 
pitcher.  In  this  position,  however  (a  fast  ball 
having  been  called  for),  if,  when  you  are  expecting 
the  batter  to  bunt,  he  should  switch  the  play  to  a 
hit  and  run,  and  bunt  the  ball  past  the  pitcher  on 
the  short-stop  side,  it  is  doubtful  whether  either 
runner  could  be  retired.  The  short-stop  on  this 
play  will  be  going  over  to  cover  second  base,  and 
when  the  ball  is  hit  in  his  direction  will  pull  up 
and  try  to  get  the  ball — then  it  is  up  to  you  at 
least  to  try  to  cover  second.  The  batter  and 
base-runner  are  likely  to  work  a  "hit-and-run 
play"  when  no  one  is  out;  be  on  the  alert.  (See 
Team  Play  22.) 

Another  play  for  the  second-baseman  to  make 
is  that  of  covering  first  base — from  the  position 
mentioned  above — to  receive  the  ball  from  the 
first-baseman,  who  goes  in  toward  the  plate  to 
cover  bunts.  Again,  on  this  play,  if  the  ball  is  re- 
covered by  the  pitcher,  it  will  be  difficult  for  the 
first-baseman  to  get  back  to  the  base;  therefore, 
the  second-baseman  should  take  first.  The  third- 
baseman  may  sometimes  handle  a  bunt  and  throw 
the  ball  to  first  before  the  first-baseman  can  get 
back;  here  again  the  second-baseman  takes  first. 
Of  course,  if  the  first-baseman  can  get  back  in  time 
to  take  the  ball,  let  him  do  so.  In  these  plays  do 
not  leave  your  position  until  the  ball  has  been  hit. 


70  BASEBALL 

Frequently  second-basemen  start  to  cover  first 
base  too  soon  in  this  play — leaving  the  position 
open  through  which  the  ball,  after  being  bunted 
hard  past  the  pitcher,  will  roll — allowing  both 
men  to  be  safe.  The  same  instructions  about 
leaving  your  position  should  apply  when  the 
opposing  team  is  making  the  hit-and-run  play 
or  when  a  man  is  stealing  second.  Try  not  to 
leave  your  position  to  cover  second  until  the  hall  is 
in  the  catcher  s  hands.  By  studying  and  playing 
according  to  the  catcher's  signals,  knowing  the 
batter,  and  playing  accordingly,  you  should  never 
be  caught  napping. 

Another  play  that  the  second-baseman  can 
make,  with  a  man  on  first  and  nobody  out,  is  the 
following  (Team  Play  i8):  As  the  first-baseman 
goes  in  toward  home  to  cover  the  bunt,  naturally 
the  base  is  left  unguarded — and  the  runner  will 
play  away  ofF.  By  a  prearranged  signal  with  the 
catcher  (who  calls  a  waste  ball  from  the  pitcher), 
the  second-baseman  can  slip  over  behind  the  base- 
runner  and  take  the  throw  from  the  catcher — to 
retire  the  runner — since  the  latter  will  be  leaning 
toward  second  if  expecting  the  bunt. 

Making  the  Double  Play 

One  of  the  most  important  functions  of  the 
short-stop  and  second-baseman  is  that  of  making 


THE  SECOND-BASEMAN  71 

the  double  play  at  second  and  first.  The  play- 
requires  the  utmost  swiftness  of  action,  and  ability 
to  catch  and  throw  the  ball  under  the  most  dif- 
ficult conditions.  The  short-stop  and  second- 
baseman  should  continually  practise  making  this 
play  with  all  possible  speed.  It  is  the  throw  from 
second  to  first  that  demands  the  greatest  speed — 
since  the  batter  is  allowed  considerable  time,  while 
the  ball  is  being  caught  and  thrown  to  second. 
Therefore,  practise  catching  the  ball,  tagging  the 
base,  and  throwing  to  first  with  a  runner  going  to 
second. 

A  Runner  on  First  Base 

One  out.  In  this  case,  the  second-baseman  should 
be  ready  to  cover  second  base  on  an  attempted 
** steal."  Now  the  question  comes  up  again,  "who 
will  cover  second  base,  the  second-baseman  or 
the  short-stop  ^ "  And  again  the  catcher's  sig- 
nals and  a  knowledge  of  the  batter  come  to  your 
assistance.  On  all  "free  hitters"  (batters  who  are 
likely  to  hit  into  any  field),  and  on  all  batters 
whose  hitting  tendencies  you  do  not  know,  you 
should  cover  second  to  take  the  throw  according 
to  what  ball  is  pitched  to  the  batter.  When,  on 
a  right-handed  batter,  you  see  the  signal  for  the 
fast  ball — you  remain  in  your  position,  because 
that  kind  of  a  ball  is  very  apt  to  be  hit  in  your 


72  BASEBALL 

direction  (and  the  short-stop  will  cover  second). 
The  short-stop  would  cover  second  also  on  all 
waste  balls  (pitch-outs)  to  a  right-handed  batter. 
If  on  this  same  batter  (right-handed)  the  curved 
ball  is  called,  the  second-baseman  should  cover 
the  base  to  retire  the  runner,  while  the  short- 
stop remains  in  his  position  to  protect  that  side 
of  the  diamond,  since  the  curved  ball  will  gen- 
erally be  hit  to  left  field. 

But  the  above  conditions  change  somewhat 
when  the  batter  is  known  to  be  a  dead  left-field 
hitter — that  is,  one  who  pulls  every  ball  (or 
nearly  every  one)  around  into  left  field.  Against 
this  batter,  the  second -baseman  would  cover 
second  base  on  all  pitched  balls.  If  the  pitcher's 
control  enables  him,  by  keeping  the  ball  away 
from  the  batter,  to  make  the  batter  hit  into  his 
weak  field — the  second-baseman  should  not  only 
be  ready  to  cover  second  base  if  the  runner  steals, 
but  to  field  the  ball  if  it  is  hit  into  his  territory. 
Therefore,  know  and  study  your  pitchers  and 
opposing  batsmen. 

On  a  left-handed  batter,  the  conditions  change 
again.  If  he  is  a  free  hitter  play  him  just  the 
reverse  on  the  catcher's  signals — when  the  man 
is  stealing  second.  For  example,  on  the  fast-ball 
signal  you  (second-baseman)  would  cover  second 
to  take  the  throw.     On  the  curved-ball  signal, 


THE  SECOND-BASEMAN  73 

the  second-baseman  would  remain  in  his  position 
while  the  short-stop  covered  second. 

If  the  batter  is  a  dead  right-field  hitter — the 
short-stop  should  cover  second  on  all  thrown 
balls.  It  is  quite  plain  from  the  above  that  there 
should  be  no  guesswork  about  covering  second 
base;  it  is  all  done  according  to  signals  and  a 
knowledge  of  the  batters.  Of  course  there  will 
be  times  when  the  ball  is  hit  exactly  contrary  to 
expectations — but  the  above  system  is  in  accor- 
dance with  the  laws  of  probability — and  will  be 
found  to  be  reliable. 

With  first  occupied  and  a  steal  expected,  play 
a  few  paces  nearer  second  to  enable  you  to  receive 
the  ball  from  the  catcher.  On  pitch-out  signs — 
when  you  are  to  cover,  you  should  be  able  to  leave 
your  position  ahead  of  time  to  take  the  throw. 
But  under  all  other  conditions  you  must  keep 
your  position  as  long  as  possible. 

Watching  for  the  drag-hit.  (This  hit  is  so  called 
because  the  batter — usually  a  fast  left-hander — 
makes  more  than  a  bunt  of  the  hit,  giving  it  just 
enough  force  to  get  it  past  the  pitcher — toward 
the  second-baseman.)  If  this  ball  is  successfully 
placed  toward  the  second-baseman,  and  if  the 
latter  is  playing  a  deep  position,  the  runner  may 
beat  the  ball  to  first  base.  Therefore,  when  play- 
ing against  a  batter  who  is  known  to  make  that 


74  BASEBALL 

play,  move  in  toward  the  base-line  far  enough 
to  command  the  situation — ^judging  the  batter's 
speed  and  your  own  ability  to  come  in  and  shoot 
the  ball  underhanded  to  first  base. 

Position  of  Baseman's  Feet  in  Covering 
Second  Base 

In  taking  throws  from  the  catcher  while  a  man 
is  stealing  do  not  worry  about  the  position  of 
your  feet;  that  should  be  the  last  consideration. 
The  first  and  most  important  thing  is  to  get  the 
ball.  If  the  throw  is  perfect,  permitting  you  to 
place  yourself  so  that  the  runner  must  slide  to 
you — all  well  and  good;  but  remember  that  po- 
sition is  nothing  if  you  don't  have  the  ball. 

A  great  deal  of  practice  is  necessary  to  enable  a 
second-baseman  (or  short-stop)  to  be  able  to  put 
the  runner  out,  stealing.  Be  sure  to  get  the  ball 
firsty  using  two  hands  when  possible — then  tag 
the  runner.  Catch  the  ball  and  sweep  it  down  on 
the  runner — all  in  one  motion;  touch  the  runner 
lightly  with  the  ball — if  you  try  to  pound  him 
with  it,  the  chances  are  that  you  will  drop  the 
ball.  Do  not  let  the  runner  coming  at  you  make 
you  nervous,  don't  worry  about  his  spikes — watch 
the  ball — and  out  of  the  corner  of  your  eye  you  can 
see  the  runner  well  enough  to  enable  you  to  play 
correctly.     When  the  play  is  at  all  close,  put  the 


THE  SECOND-BASEMAN  75 

ball  speedily  down  in  front  of  the  base,  thus  com- 
peUing  the  runner  to  slide  into  it. 


Runner  on  First  Base 

Two  out.  Play  back  well,  but  a  little  nearer 
second  base.  However,  always  play  according  to 
the  batter's  habit  of  hitting — and  the  catcher's 
signals.  With  the  knowledge  thus  gained,  and 
knowing  that  with  two  out  the  runner  will  very 
probably  attempt  to  steal  (unless  he  is  three  or 
four  runs  behind),  you  may  greatly  facilitate 
matters. 

Runners  on  First  and  Second 

None  out.  Here  again  you  must  watch  for  the 
sacrifice  bunt — especially  if  the  opposing  club 
wants  one  or  two  runs  badly.  (Read  Team  Plays 
^9/j  ^>  ^>  ^0  Play  as  directed  with  first  occupied 
and  none  out — a  little  nearer  first  base,  where  you 
can  cover  first  base  if  the  first-baseman  goes  in  to 
get  the  bunt.  Always  study  the  hitter's  motion 
with  his  bat — he  will  generally  reveal  to  you  by 
some  little  motion  the  fact  that  he  will  bunt. 
Then,  as  soon  as  you  see  that  he  intends  to  bunt, 
start  quickly  for  the  ball — but  be  ready  to  stop 
and  cover  first  if  the  ball  can  be  handled  by  the 
first-baseman  or  pitcher.     Three  men  around  the 


76  BASEBALL 

ball  and  nobody  covering  the  base  is  a  common 
condition  when  the  ball  is  hit  rather  slowly  be- 
tween first  and  second  bases.  So  cover  first  base 
if  the  other  men  can  field  the  ball. 

One  out.  Hold  the  runner  on  second  base  as 
closely  as  possible;  do  not  let  him  take  a  big  lead. 
Run  toward  second  base  as  though  to  catch  the 
ball  thrown  there  by  the  pitcher.  But  do  not 
leave  your  position  while  the  {.itcher  is  delivering 
the  ball  to  the  batter — the  ball  might  be  hit 
through  your  territory.  By  a  prearranged  signal 
with  the  pitcher,  you  can  sometimes  catch  the 
runner  napping.  (See  Team  Play  14.)  Play  your 
usual  position,  according  to  who  is  batting — always 
being  on  the  alert  for  fast  left-handed  batters. 
Watch  the  catcher's  signals.  If,  as  the  ball  is  hit 
hard  at  you,  you  field  it  cleanly,  throw  it  to  second 
base;  hut  if  you  fumble,  throw  to  first  base.  In 
tossing  or  throwing  the  ball  to  the  short-stop  on 
double  plays,  throw  it  so  that  the  fielder  receives 
it  on  the  inside  of  the  base  (within  the  diamond); 
he  can  then  throw  unobstructed  to  first.  And  in 
attempting  a  double  play,  be  sure  to  retire  the 
first  man,  anyway! 

If,  as  the  hit-and-run  is  being  played,  the  ball 
is  hit  to  your  left,  play  it  to  first  base;  for  the 
runner  will  have  got  such  a  start  off  first  that  it 
will  be  difl&cult  to  catch  him  at  second.     Slow 


THE  SECOND-BASEMAN  77 

balls  should  be  thrown  to  first  base,  as  doubles 
are  out  of  the  question. 

If  the  ball  is  hit  at  you  in  such  a  way  that  you 
catch  it  ahead  of  the  runner  on  first  (who  will  be 
on  his  way  to  second)  touch  him,  and  throw  to 
first  base,  making  a  double  play.  If  the  runner 
should  stop  between  the  bases,  preventing  you 
from  touching  him,  run  him  back  toward  first, 
then  throw  to  first,  retiring  the  batter,  and  leav- 
ing the  runner  to  be  caught  between  first  and 
second. 

Whenever  you  have  a  man  caught  between 
bases,  always  drive  him  back  toward  the  base 
from  which  he  came.  If  he  is  between  first  and 
second,  make  the  put-out  at  first.  Do  not  per- 
mit the  base-runner  to  take  a  big  lead  off  the  base. 

Runner  on  Second 

None  out.  Play  in  for  the  sacrifice  bunt  (if  you 
calculate  that  he  will  attempt  it).  (See  Team 
Plays  ig  d  and  e.)  If  the  ball  be  hit  to  you,  the 
play  is  generally  to  retire  the  runner  at  first. 

One  out.  The  runner  is  very  apt  to  steal  third, 
so  help  the  short-stop  to  keep  him  close  to  the 
base  by  feinting  to  take  the  ball  from  the  pitcher. 
Be  careful,  however,  of  leaving  your  position  open, 
especially  if  the  batter  be  a  right-field  hitter. 
Occasionally  it  is  advisable,  if  the  runner  plays 


78  BASEBALL 

ofF  a  great  distance,  to  work  a  signal  with  the 
pitcher  (through  the  catcher)  and  catch  the 
runner  off  the  base.  (See  Team  Play  14.)  Study 
your  batter. 

Two  out.  Play  deep — and  get  the  batter  at  first 
base — always  !     For  conditions  of  play  with: 

Man  on  third  base,  see  Team  Play  12. 

Man  on  second  and  third  bases,  see  Team  Plays 
10  and  II. 

Man  on  first,  second,  and  third  bases,  see  Team 
Plays  I,  2,  3,  4,  and  5. 

Man  on  first  and  third  bases,  see  Team  Plays 
6,  7,  8,  and  9. 

Be  prepared  for  the  double  steal — that  is,  the 
man  on  third  scoring  while  the  man  on  first  goes 
to  second.  In  order  to  prevent  the  opponents 
from  making  this  play  successfully  the  second- 
baseman  should  cut  in  ten  or  fifteen  feet  in  front 
of  second  base — and  if  the  man  is  going  home 
intercept  the  ball  and  throw  it  home;  if  he  is  not 
going  home,  let  the  ball  go  to  short-stop  who  is 
covering  second.  On  this  play  the  second-base- 
man has  everything  in  front  of  him — he  can  see 
the  ball  and  the  runner  on  third.  Sometimes 
the  man  at  third  will  make  a  feint  to  go  home — 
stopping  when  about  fifteen  feet  off  the  base. 
In  this  case  the  second-baseman  can  snap  the  ball 
to  third,  catching  the  runner  ofF  the  base. 


THE  SECOND-BASEMAN  79 

If  the  ball  thrown  by  the  catcher  is  thrown  at 
such  a  height  that,  in  your  opinion,  it  will  not  go  to 
second,  catch  it  whether  the  man  starts  from  third 
or  not — as  the  low  throw  will  hit  the  ground  and 
probably  get  away  from  the  short-stop — letting 
the  man  score  from  third — and  placing  the  runner 
from  first  on  third.  By  practising  this  play,  you 
will  soon  become  able  to  judge  whether  the  ball 
will  carry  to  second  or  not. 

The  breaking  up  of  this  "double  steal"  can  be 
accomplished  best  when  the  "pitch-out"  (waste- 
ball)  signal  is  given.  Then  the  positions  may  be 
left  open  with  less  danger  of  being  hit  through. 

When  no  "pitch-out"  sign  is  given— the^second- 
baseman  (and  short-stop)  should  play  a  bit  nearer 
the  base  and  the  line — not  leaving  this  position 
until  the  ball  is  either  hit  or  in  the  catcher's 
hands. 

Always,  as  the  hatter  takes  his  position  in  the  box, 
you  should  decide  what  you  will  do  with  the  hall  if  it 
is  hit  to  you. 


THE   SHORT-STOP 

Many  points  relative  to  the  short-stop  have 
been  covered  in  the  chapter  on  the  second-base- 
man— they  will  be  referred  to  in  this  chapter. 

The  first  thing  you  should  do  when  you  arrive 
on  the  field  before  a  game  is  to  note  how  the 
wind  is  blowing.  The  wind  will  at  times  enable 
you  to  catch  many  a  fly  ball  that  you  would  not 
even  try  for  ordinarily.  Play  the  ball  in  a  high 
wind  according  to  the  same  instructions  given  to 
the  second-baseman  on  fly  ball. 

Learn  to  "get  the  ball  away"  fast  and  true — 
overhanded  when  you  have  time  (on  a  hard-hit 
ball)  and  underhanded  when  you  are  hurried. 
Proficiency  in  this  latter  throw,  especially  to  first 
base,  requires  diligent  practice. 

Learn  to  use  your  gloved  hand  alone  on  balls 
that  you  see  it  is  impossible  to  get  two  hands  on. 
Don't  be  afraid  of  errors.  Try  for  everything — 
many  a  game  has  been  saved  by  a  "wild  lunge," 
as  it  is  called — whereby  a  player  has  actually 
hurled  himself  at  a  ball,  catching  it  almost  mirac- 
ulously. 

80 


THE  SHORT-STOP  8i 

The  majority  of  infielders  have  what  is  called 
a  weak  side;  that  is,  there  is  one  side,  right  or 
left,  on  which  it  is  difficult  for  them  to  cover 
ground  successfully.  Players  can  overcome  this 
weakness  somewhat  by  having  the  ball  batted 
on  their  weak  side  constantly  in  practice.  (Young 
players  should  pay  particular  attention  to  devel- 
oping their  ability  to  cover  ground  on  both  sides.) 

Make  a  study  of  the  batters.  Note  what  kinds 
of  balls  they  hit,  where  they  generally  hit — ^whether 
they  are  free  hitters,  or  whether  they  are  dead 
right  or  left  field  hitters.  Remember  the  speed 
of  the  various  players — this  will  enable  you  to 
regulate  the  speed  with  which  you  must  make 
your  plays.  Little  things  are  happening  con- 
stantly, which,  if  remembered,  will  give  you  a 
very  valuable  knowledge  of  the  players  whom 
you  are  to  meet  day  after  day. 

Cover  third  on  all  "hit-and-run"  plays  when 
the  third-baseman  goes  in  for  batted  or  bunted 
balls.  You  can  be  of  no  use  remaining  in  your 
position  when  the  ball  is  bunted  or  hit  toward 
third.  So  either  back  up  the  play  (on  a  ball  that 
you  can  recover  if  the  third-baseman  misses  it) 
or  cover  third.  Don't  worry  about  second — as 
the  second-baseman  naturally  swings  around  to 
cover  that  base  when  the  ball  is  hit  to  your  side 
of  the  diamond.     When  you  attempt  anything 


82  BASEBALL 

in  the  way  of  fielding  get  started  quickly — it 
is  the  fractions  of  seconds  in  time  that  make  worlds 
of  difference  in  baseball. 

When  you  have  a  runner  caught  between  second 
and  third,  run  him  back  to  second  and  make  the 
put-out  there — in  fact,  always  run  a  base-runner 
back  to  the  base  from  which  he  came,  trying  to  have 
him  put  out  at  that  base.  If  he  is  not  put  out,  he 
will  at  least  have  been  prevented  from  getting  the 
extra  base.  Start  quickly  and  get  in  front  of 
hard -hit  balls;  learn  to  play  them  with  your 
hands,  not  with  your  feet  or  body — this  can  be 
accomplished  only  by  judging  the  bounds.  (Get 
into  the  habit  of  catching  grounders  on  good 
bounds — that  is,  playing  the  ball — otherwise  "the 
ball  plays  you.")  When  you  have  handled  the 
ball  cleanly  there  will  be  little  difficulty  in  throw- 
ing the  man  out  at  first;  but  if  you  fumble  the 
ball,  you  must  be  speedy  in  getting  the  ball  to 
first  to  retire  the  man.  Remember  that  you  must 
play  faster  on  a  left-handed  batter  than  on  a 
right-handed  one. 

Come  in  rapidly  on  all  balls  that  are  hit 
slowly  in  your  territory;  play  them  with  all  pos- 
sible speed — using  the  underhanded  throw.  Fre- 
quently you  will  be  compelled  to  play  the  slow 
ball  with  the  bare  hand,  picking  it  up  and  throw- 
ing it  while  on  the  dead  run;  this  should  be  prac- 


THE  SHORT-STOP  83 

tised  until  it  is  not  difficult  to  do.  It  is  well  in 
practice  to  try  all  ways  of  catching  the  ball.  But 
in  a  game  never  use  one  hand  when  you  can  get 
both  on  the  ball. 

Go  after  all  fly  balls,  learning  by  constant  try- 
ing how  far  you  can  go  for  them.  When  you  go 
after  a  ball  and  see  that  you  can  get  it — avoid 
collisions  by  calling  loudly:  "Mine!" 

Go  after  everything !  Don't  be  afraid  of  mak- 
ing errors.  (A  manager,  captain,  or  coach  can  al- 
ways tell  whether  or  not  a  man  is  trying  hard.) 

In  fielding  your  position,  protect  your  weak  side 
(see  instruction  to  second-baseman);  that  is,  so 
divide  up  your  territory  as  to  leave  the  larger  part 
on  your  strong  side. 

Learn  to  "get  the  ball  away  from  you"  with 
the  least  possible  delay.  Practise  catching  and 
throwing  with  one  motion.  A  ball  that  travels 
with  great  speed,  but  thrown  with  a  long,  slow 
motion,  is  not  nearly  so  effective  as  a  slower  ball 
thrown  with  a  speedy  motion. 

Be  ready  to  cover  second  base,  if  the  ball  is  hit 
on  the  first-base  side  of  the  diamond. 

Play  as  deeply  as  possible,  that  is,  as  far  as 
you  can  back  of  the  base-line;  this  will  enable  you 
to  cover  a  great  deal  of  ground  on  hard-hit  balls. 
The  condition  of  your  arm  and  the  speed  of  the 
runner  should  regulate  this  distance. 


84  BASEBALL 

When  the  ball  is  hit  past  the  left-fielder — go  out 
into  left  field  (as  the  centre-fielder  crosses  over  to 
help  the  left-fielder  relay  the  ball  in)  and  coach 
outfielder  where  to  throw  the  ball.  The  second- 
baseman  will  cover  second  base.  (See  Diagrams 
IV  and  V,  pages  200  and  201;  also  study  Dia- 
grams II,  III,  VI,  and  VII,  pages  199,  200,  201, 
and  202.) 

Play  your  position  according  to  the  individual 
batters — and  according  to  the  kind  of  balls  pitched. 
(See  Second-Baseman — Getting  the  Catcher's  Sig- 
nals.) You  must  play  with  the  greatest  possible 
speed  on  fast  left-handed  batters.  Always  be  on 
the  alert  to  pass  your  signals  to  the  outfield. 
(See  Second-Baseman — Passing  Catcher's  Signals 
to  Outfield.) 

In  throwing  or  tossing  the  ball  to  second  base 
at  the  beginning  of  a  double  play,  throw  the  ball 
on  the  inside  of  the  base,  so  that  the  second-base- 
man will  have  a  better  opportunity  of  throwing 
to  first  base.  And  remember  that  if  you  are 
close  to  second  (but  can't  make  the  double  your- 
self) toss  the  ball  to  second  rather  than  throw  it 
— make  your  motion  speedy — keeping  the  ball 
high — thus  giving  the  second-baseman  time  to 
cover  the  base  and  catch  the  ball. 

Back  up  second  base  on  balls  thrown  to  second 
from  right  field  (letting  second-baseman  cover  the 


THE  SHORT-STOP  85 

ball);  cover  second  base  on  balls  thrown  from  left 
field  to  the  base  (second-baseman  backing  you  up) 
— these  directions  apply  only  when,  with  no  run- 
ner on  base,  a  single  has  been  hit  to  the  outfield. 
If,  with  nobody  on  base,  as  you  fumble  the 
ball  you  see  that  you  cannot  put  the  runner  out 
at  first,  HOLD  THE  BALL.  It  IS  absolutely  useless 
and  sometimes  dangerous  to  throw  when  you  see 
that  the  man  cannot  be  retired. 

Runner  on  First  Base 

See  directions  to  second-baseman  under  the 
same  conditions. 

Cover  second  base  according  to  what  ball  is 
pitched — and  according  to  the  batter — whether 
he  is  left  or  right  handed,  etc.  With  a  runner  on 
first  base,  if  a  base-hit  is  made  to  right  field  or 
right  centre  field,  get  in  line  with  the  throw  from 
the  fielder  to  third  base.  Stand  about  thirty  feet 
in  front  of  the  third-baseman.  The  ball  will  be 
thrown  to  third  base  to  cut  off  the  runner,  who 
will  probably  try  to  go  from  first  base  to  third 
on  the  hit.  Be  ready  to  catch  the  ball  if  the 
third-baseman  should  tell  you  to  (he  will  do  so  if 
he  sees  that  the  runner  cannot  be  caught  at  third 
base),  and  play  it  to  second  to  retire  the  batter, 
who,  on  the  throw-in  will  be  trying  for  that  base. 

If  (when  it  is  up  to  you  to  cover  second  base) 


86  BASEBALL 

you  see  the  runner  stealing,  do  not  leave  your 
position  immediately — you  can  hesitate  and  still 
be  able  to  reach  second  ahead  of  the  runner. 

Be  on  the  alert  for  push-hits  (or  drag-hits),  and 
hit-and-run  plays.     (See  Team  Plays  21  and  22  a. 

When  the  ball  is  hit  to  your  right  in  such  a 
way  that  after  you  have  fielded  it  you  see 
that  you  can't  get  the  man  at  second  or  first, 
feint  to  throw  to  first,  and  throw  to  second  (you 
might  get  the  runner  as  he  steps  over  the  base). 

Always  be  on  the  alert  for  a  steal  or  hit-and- 
run;  be  ready  to  cover  second  according  to  the  ball 
called  by  the  catcher.  (See  instructions  to  second- 
baseman  on  same  play.) 

Two  out.  Play  back  so  as  to  cover  ground, 
making  the  put-out  at  the  easiest  base.  Cover 
second  base  according  to  signals  in  case  the  runner 
steals. 

Runner  on  Second  Base 

When  second  base  is  occupied,  if  you  fumble  a 
hit  ball  and  see  that  you  cannot  retire  the  runner 
at  first,  make  a  blufF  to  throw  to  first  base,  whirl 
and  throw  quickly  to  third — the  runner  from 
second  to  third  will  often  be  rounding  that  base 
to  get  a  lead  for  home,  and  your  throw  may 
catch  him. 

On  a  ball  that  is  hit  between  short-stop  and 


THE   SHORT-STOP  87 

third,  throw  the  man  out  at  third,  especially  on 
a  ball  that  would  be  very  difficult  to  throw  to 
first. 

If  the  runner  on  second  base  is  needed  by  his 
side  to  tie  the  score  or  win,  then,  when  it  is  pos- 
sible, throw  him  out  at  third. 

When  there  is  a  runner  on  second  base,  it  is 
the  short-stop's  duty  to  prevent  that  runner  from 
getting  a  large  lead  ofF  the  base.  By  a  pre- 
arranged signal  with  the  pitcher  (see  Team  Play 
14),  such  as  a  nod  of  the  head,  a  motion  of  the 
hand,  etc.,  he  should  start  for  second,  as  the 
pitcher  wheels  and  throws  there.  At  other  times, 
without  using  the  signal  with  the  pitcher,  he 
should  start  back  to  second  merely  to  get  the 
runner  to  do  the  same  (at  the  same  time  the 
pitcher  throws  to  the  batter  as  the  runner  is  go- 
ing back  to  second — his  lead  toward  third,  of 
course,  being  cut  down  considerably).  The  short- 
stop should  be  careful,  in  running  the  man  back 
to  second,  not  to  leave  his  own  position  open  for 
the  batter  to  hit  through.  Don't  leave  your  po- 
sition when  the  pitcher  is  delivering  the  ball. 
For  position  of  feet,  catching  ball,  etc.,  see  Posi- 
tion of  Baseman's  Feet — The  Second-Baseman. 

None  out.     (Read  Team  Plays  19  J,  e.) 

Very  frequently  the  bunt  is  played  here.  A 
successful  method  of  breaking  up  the  play  is  for 
you  to  run  the  man  back  to  second  (leaving  your 


88  BASEBALL 

position  open) — the  pitcher  puts  a  good  ball  over 
to  the  batter  to  bunt — then  the  pitcher  and  first- 
baseman  run  in  and  field  the  ball  to  third,  catch- 
ing the  man  there,  for  you  will  have  held  him  up 
long  enough  to  allow  the  play  to  go  through. 
(See  Team  Play  15.) 

One  out.  On  all  balls  hit  to  you,  unless  the  run- 
ner can  be  retired  easily  at  third,  play  the  hall  to 
first  base.  Then  there  will  be  a  man  on  third — 
hut  two  out.  And  if  the  man  should  make  third 
safely  as  you  throw  there,  there  will  result  the 
very  undesirable  situation  of  a  man  on  first  and 
third — with  only  one  out. 

Hold  the  runner  as  close  to  second  as  you  can 
without  leaving  too  much  space  open  for  a  left- 
field  hitter  to  hit  through.  This  will  help  to  pre- 
vent stolen  bases  and  hit-and-run  plays.  When 
the  runner  refuses  to  be  driven  back  to  the  base, 
use  the  signal  (a  slight  nod  or  any  hand  sign) 
with  the  pitcher  and  catch  the  runner  napping. 
(See  Team  Play  14.) 

Two  out.  Unless  you  are  several  runs  ahead, 
hold  the  runner  on  the  base  and  throw  the  bat- 
ter out  at  first. 

Runners  on  First  and  Second 

See  Team  Play  13. 

For  information  as  to  what  to  expect  the  batter 
to  do,  see  Team  Plays  19  /,  g,  h,  i. 


THE  SHORT-STOP  89 

In  case  of  a  double  steal — both  men  stealing — 
short-stop  should  cover  second  in  accordance  with 
the  usual  method  of  signals. 

Runner  on  Third 

The  position  to  be  taken  and  the  style  of  play 
to  be  followed  here  depend  upon  the  score  and  the 
stage  of  the  game.  For  instructions  whether  to 
play  in  and  retire  the  runner  at  home,  or  play 
back,  see  Team  Play  12. 

Whenever  you  are  playing  back,  with  a  runner 
on  third,  disregard  that  runner  on  third,  and  play 
for  the  batter. 

Runners  on  Second  and  Third 
See  Team  Plays  10  and  11. 

Runners  on  First,  Second,  and  Third 

See  Team  Plays  i,  2,  3,  4,  and  5. 

» 

Runners  on  First  and  Third 

See  Team  Plays  6,  7,  8,  and  9. 

Here  the  runners  may  attempt  what  is  called 
"a  d9uble  steal."  In  this  play  both  runners 
attempt  to  advance  a  base. 

Before  taking  part  in  breaking  up  this  play,  if, 
after  considering  the  batter  and  the  catcher's 
signals,  you  think  the  ball  will  be  hit  in  your 


90  BASEBALL 

direction,  delay  as  long  as  possible  before  leav- 
ing your  position  to  cover  second  base — otherwise 
leave  as  soon  as  the  ball  is  on  the  way  to  the  batter. 

Observing  the  above  instructions,  you  should 
cover  second  base  if  the  runner  on  first  is  stealing. 
The  second-baseman  will  cut  in  behind  the  pitcher 
and,  if  the  runner  on  third  base  starts  for  home, 
will  intercept  the  ball  and  throw  it  home.  If  the 
runner  remains  on  third,  the  second-baseman  will 
let  the  ball  go  to  second  base;  then  you  are  to 
catch  the  ball  and  retire  the  runner  coming  from 
first  base.  But  be  on  the  alert  to  prevent  the 
runner  on  third  from  scoring  while  you  are  going 
after  the  runner  at  second.  On  this  play  you  must 
watch  the  ball;  if  the  second-baseman  lets  it  go 
to  you,  catch  it  and  tag  the  runner,  but  be  quick 
about  it,  lest  the  man  score  from  third.  If  the 
man  from  first  stops  before  arriving  at  second, 
run  him  back  toward  first  base — all  the  while 
watching  the  man  on  third — make  the  put-out  at 
first  base.  If  the  man  starts  home  from  third, 
of  course  play  him.  (Practise  receiving  the  ball 
on  the  run.) 

Always  as  the  hatter  takes  his  position  in  the  box, 
you  should  decide  what  you  will  do  with  the  hall  if  it 
is  hit  to  you. 


VI 

THE  THIRD-BASEMAN 

General  Instructions  for  the  Third- 
Baseman 

Protect  your  weak  side — that  is,  if  it  is  hard 
for  you  to  catch  balls  that  are  hit  on  one  side, 
move  over  slightly  toward  that  side,  so  as  to  cover 
the  ground  the  more  easily.  Practise  so  as  to 
strengthen  your  weak  side. 

On  all  bunts  or  other  hit  balls  which  the  pitcher 
handles,  get  into  the  habit  of  dropping  back  to 
your  base — you  will  be  useless  standing  in  the 
diamond  if  a  runner  is  advancing  to  your  base. 

Go  after  all  slow  hits  between  you  and  the 
short-stop.  Since,  on  this  kind  of  a  ball,  you  will 
be  running  toward  first  base,  you  can  throw  the 
batter  out  at  first  base  much  easier  than  the 
short-stop  can — for  he  will  be  running  away  from 
first  and  consequently  in  a  bad  position  to  throw. 
But  be  careful  about  attempting  to  handle  hard-- 
hit  balls  which  are  between  you  and  the  short- 
stop. You  will  knock  this  kind  of  a  ball  away 
from  you,  and  out  of  the  reach  of  the  short-stop, 

91 


92  BASEBALL 

when  ordinarily  he  could  handle  the  ball  easily. 
By  constant  practice  you  will  learn  how  much 
ground  you  can  safely  cover  on  fast  balls.  Always 
be  ready  to  receive  the  ball  from  the  catcher — 
going  back  to  your  base  as  the  ball  hits  the 
catcher's  glove. 

The  distance  which  you  should  play  off  the 
base  must  be  determined  by  your  speed  and 
abihty  to  cover  ground.  A  safe  distance  is  about 
three  paces — more  if  you  can  play  it  safely. 
Always  play  so  as  to  prevent  a  runner  from 
getting  a  big  lead  toward  home. 

The  Squeeze  Play 

See  Team  Play  23. 

It  is  impossible  for  you  or  any  other  infielder 
to  break  up  the  squeeze  play  if  the  ball  is  hit  on 
the  ground;  but  you  can  prevent  two  men  from 
scoring  by  keeping  your  head,  doing  a  little  think- 
ing, and  acting  accordingly.  When  only  third 
base  is  occupied  and  the  squeeze  play  is  worked 
successfully,  your  play  is  to  throw  the  ball  to 
first  base,  as  the  runner  from  third  will  have  too 
big  a  lead  off  the  base  to  be  caught  at  home.  But, 
if  there  is  a  runner  on  second  and  third,  and,  on 
the  squeeze  play,  the  ball  is  bunted  to  you,  you 
should  make  a  sharp  motion  as  though  to  throw 
to  first  base,  but  hold  the  ball  and  catch  the  man 


THE  THIRD-BASEMAN  93 

who  was  leading  off  second  when  the  play  began 
and  by  this  time  will  be  rounding  third  base.  If 
this  second  man  plays  the  game  rightly,  he  will 
have  taken  a  big  lead  off  second  and,  being  very 
near  third  when  the  ball  is  bunted,  will  attempt  to 
score  on  your  throw  to  first.  You  can  tell  whether 
the  man  on  second  is  in  this  play  if  he  gets  a  big 
running  start  when  the  pitcher  winds  up. 

Handling  Fly  Balls 

For  suggestions  on  playing  according  to  the 
wind,  etc.,  see  directions  to  the  second-baseman 
on  this  subject. 

No  Runners  on  Base 

-.  Play  the  batter — that  is,  play  according  to  who 
the  batter  is.  If  you  know  him  to  be  a  fast  man 
and  one  who  bunts,  play  in  for  him — that  is,  a 
few  feet  inside  the  base-Hne.  If  he  is  either  slow, 
or  a  man  who  seldom  bunts,  play  back  of  the  base- 
line a  few  paces. 

Never  play  in  close  for  a  batter  who  has  two 
strikes;  he  will  seldom  attempt  to  bunt. 

Learn  to  diagnose  a  batter^s  intention  to  bunt. 
There  is  a  distinct  difference  between  the  pre- 
liminary motions  of  bunting  and  the  preliminary 
motions  of  hitting  the  ball.  If  you  watch  closely, 
you  will  be  able  to  tell  when  a  batter  will  bunt — 


94  BASEBALL 

at  least  you  will  know  just  before  he  bunts — and 
that  will  allow  you  time  enough  to  take  a  few 
steps  toward  him.  By  thus  studying  the  batters 
closely,  you  will  be  enabled  to  play  a  little  deeper 
than  ordinarily,  coming  in  fast  when  you  see  that 
the  batter  will  bunt.  Of  course,  the  deeper  you 
play  the  less  chance  there  will  be  of  having  a  ball 
knocked  past  you. 

Remember  that,  on  all  hard-hit  balls  (from  a 
right-handed  batter)  which  you  field  cleanly,  you 
can  throw  the  runner  out  at  first  by  forty  feet, 
since  he  is  thrown  completely  off  his  stride  when 
swinging  at  the  ball,  and  is  only  ten  feet  from 
home  when  you  have  the  ball  in  your  hand.  So 
steady  up  and  make  the  play  sure.  But  on  all  slow 
balls  which  roll  toward  third,  hurry  in  and  snap 
the  ball  to  first  by  a  sharp  underhanded  throw. 
(Practise  this  throw  constantly.)  It  is  the  left- 
handed  batter  whom  you  must  watch  carefully. 
As  he  hits  the  ball,  he  swings  directly  into  his 
stride  toward  first  base.  Therefore  when  he  hits 
the  ball  you  must  lose  no  time  in  getting  it  to  first 
base.     Play  in  a  little  on  left-handed  batters. 

Runner  on  First 

Judge  by  the  speed  of  the  runner  and  the 
velocity  with  which  the  ball  comes  to  you  whether 
or  not  you  can  retire  the  runner  at  second  base. 


THE  THIRD-BASEMAN  95 

If  the  ball  comes  to  you  slowly,  run  in  and,  if 
necessary,  pick  it  up  with  one  hand;  snap  it  to 
first  base  underhanded. 

If,  as  you  fumble  a  batted  ball,  you  see  that  you 
cannot  even  retire  the  batter,  make  a  feint  to  first 
base — then  whirl  and  snap  it  to  second.  You 
may  be  able  to  catch  the  runner  at  second  as  he 
rounds  that  base  preparatory  to  going  to  third 
on  your  throw  to  first.  When  you  have  thrown 
a  batted  ball  to  first  base,  hurry  back  to  third  to 
cover  it  in  case  any  other  play  comes  up. 

On  all  hit  balls  which  the  pitcher  handles,  drop 
back  to  your  base.  (In  other  words,  always  cover 
your  base  when  you  are  not  actually  taking  part 
in  some  play  in  the  diamond.) 

When  there  is  a  runner  on  first  base,  if  a  base- 
hit  is  made  to  right  field — or  right  centre  field — 
the  ball  should  be  thrown  by  the  outfielder  to 
third  base  to  prevent  the  runner  from  going  from 
first  to  third.  The  short-stop  should  place  him- 
self in  line  with  the  thrown  ball;  and  if  the  third- 
baseman  sees  that  the  ball  cannot  reach  third  so 
as  to  retire  the  runner,  he  should  call  to  the 
short-stop  to  intercept  it — the  short-stop  can  then 
play  it  to  second  base.  This  play  of  the  short- 
stop's will  often  retire  the  batsman  who  will  have 
started  for  second  base  on  the  throw-in. 

None   out.    Watch   for   the  bunt  or  hit-and- 


96  BASEBALL 

run  play.  These  are  the  plays  which  the  batter 
may  attempt;  therefore  be  ready  for  them. 
(For  information  about  the  conditions  in  which  a 
batter  may  bunt,  see  Team  Play  19.)  A  batter 
will  seldom  bunt  when  he  has  two  strikes. 

One  out.  There  is  little  or  no  danger  of  the 
batter  bunting,  unless  he  is  a  very  fast  runner,  so 
the  third-baseman  can  play  pretty  well  back — 
always,  however,  watching  carefully  for  indication 
of  a  bunt — and  being  ready  to  go  in  fast  if  the  ball 
is  bunted. 

If  the  ball  is  hit  hard  to  you,  you  should  throw 
to  second  to  enable  the  second-baseman  to  com- 
plete a  double  play.  (When  throwing  to  second 
in  this  case,  throw  the  ball  so  that  the  second- 
baseman  can  catch  it  inside  of  the  diamond  in 
front  of  base.  In  this  way  you  reduce  the  chances 
of  his  throw  to  first  being  bothered  by  the  runner 
coming  from  first.)  Make  this  throw  to  second 
base  good;  you  should  at  least  retire  the  man  at 
second. 

Two  out.  Pay  little  or  no  attention  to  the  base- 
runner.  Get  the  batter  at  first  base.  The  bat- 
ter has  the  full  ninety  feet  to  run — ^while  the  man 
on  first  base  has  a  "lead"  of  from  ten  to  twelve 
feet  or  more. 


THE  THIRD-BASEMAN  97 

Runners  on  First  and  Second 

None  out.  Watch  carefully  for  a  bunt.  If  the 
ball  is  bunted  to  you,  there  is  hardly  ever  a 
chance  to  retire  the  man  at  third  or  second — so 
throw  to  first.  (Read  Team  Play  19.)  Be  ready 
to  cover  your  base  in  case  the  pitcher  is  making 
a  play  to  get  the  runner  at  third.     (See  Team  Play 

IS-) 

One  out.  Be  ready  to  receive  the  ball  on  the 
catcher's  throw  if  the  runner  should  attempt  to 
steal.  Frequently  when  the  runner  is  stealing 
third,  the  batter  will  make  a  feint  at  bunting  to 
draw  the  third-baseman  off  the  base.  In  this 
case  the  third-baseman  should  take  a  step  toward 
the  batter  as  he  sees  him  attempt  to  bunt — but 
he  can  stop  immediately  when  the  ball  is  missed  by 
the  batter — and  can  cover  third  in  plenty  of  time 
to  take  the  ball  as  the  catcher  throws.  If  it  is 
a  bunt,  the  best  you  can  do  is  to  get  the  man  at 
first;  if  it  is  a  blufF,  there  is  only  one  thing  for 
you  to  do — cover  your  base. 

On  a  hard-hit  ball  you  have  several  ways  of 
working  a  double  play: 

(i)  On  a  ball  hit  to  your  right,  and  caught  near 
the  base,  touch  third  and  throw  to  first  or  second. 

(2)  On  a  ball  hit  directly  at  you,  or  to  your 
left,  you  can  sometimes  touch  the  runner  coming 


98  BASEBALL 

from  second  and  throw  to  second,   retiring  the 
runner  from  first. 

(3)  On  a  ball  hit  directly  at  you — ^when  it  is 
not  possible  to  touch  the  runner  going  to  third 
throw  to  second;  from  there  the  double  will  be 
completed  at  first  base. 

(4)  On  a  line  drive  (which  you  catch)  you  can 
play  the  ball  to  second  or  first. 

These  plays  are  simple  enough;  but  in  order 
to  play  them  right  you  should  think  them  over  as 
the  batsman  takes  his  position  at  the  plate,  plan- 
ning what  you  would  do  if  the  ball  be  hit  to  you. 
Do  all  the  thinking  you  can  ahead  of  time. 

Two  out.  It  is  generally  safest  to  play  the 
batter,  as  he  has  the  longest  distance  to  travel. 
But,  of  course,  if  the  ball  is  fielded  by  you  close 
to  the  base,  the  easiest  and  safest  thing  for  you 
to  do  is  to  touch  your  base. 

Runners  on  First,  Second,  and  Third 

None  out  or  one  out.  If  the  batter  is  a  hard 
left-field  hitter,  it  is  well  to  play  a  few  paces  back 
of  the  line.  Whether  or  not  to  play  deep  and  try 
for  a  double  play,  letting  the  man  on  third  score, 
depends  upon  the  score,  the  stage  of  the  game, 
etc.  These  conditions  are  dealt  with  in  Team 
Plays  I,  2,  3,  4,  and  5. 

On  a  hard-hit  ball,  which  you  field  cleanly,  your 


THE  THIRD-BASEMAN  99 

play  would  be  to  throw  the  ball  home,  retiring 
the  man  on  a  force-out.  (The  catcher  would  then 
throw  the  batter  out  at  first.) 

On  a  slow-hit  ball,  of  course,  you  would  try  to 
get  the  ball  to  first  base  ahead  of  the  batter,  im- 
mediately going  back  to  cover  your  own  base  to 
receive  the  ball  if  it  is  returned  to  you  by  the  first- 
baseman. 

Two  out.  If  the  ball  is  hit  hard  to  you,  touch 
your  base,  forcing  out  the  man  from  second 
(there  is  no  use  throwing  to  another  base  unless 
you  are  absolutely  forced  to  do  so);  otherwise 
throw  to  first  base. 

Runner  on  Second  Base 
(Study  Diagram  III,  page  200.) 

None  out.  Play  as  directed  with  man  on  first 
and  second  and  none  out,  always  being  ready  for 
a  sacrifice  bunt.  But  never  leave  your  position 
if  the  runner  is  stealing  third  until  the  ball  is  either 
hit  or  missed  by  the  batsman. 

One  out.  Play  as  directed  with  man  on  first 
and  second  and  one  out.  Sometimes  when  the 
ball  is  hit  hard  to  you,  the  runner  will  stop  be- 
tween second  and  third — in  this  case  run  him 
back  to  second — making  the  put-out  at  that  base. 
(A base-runner,  when  caught  between  bases,  should 
be  run  back  toward  the  base  from  which  he  came. 


100  BASEBALL 

If  a  man  is  caught  between  home  and  third  base, 
he  should  be  run  back  to  third  and  put  out  there.) 
In  case  the  man  at  second  hasn't  started  for  third 
(or  if  he  is  but  a  few  steps  from  second)  throw 
the  ball  to  first — you  will  have  plenty  of  time  to 
take  a  quick  look  toward  second  before  throwing 
to  first.  If  you  fumble  the  ball  and  can't  get  the 
man  at  first,  make  a  bluff  to  throw  to  first,  whirl 
and  throw  to  second;  on  this  play  the  runner  on 
second  will  often  start  for  third  on  your  motion 
to  throw  to  first,  and  you  can  catch  him  off  second. 
Two  out.  Throw  to  first  base  to  retire  the 
runner. 

Runner  on  Third  Base 
(Study  Diagram  VIII,  page  202.) 

One  or  none  out,     (See  Team  Play  12.) 
Two  out.    Throw  to  first  base. 

Runners  on  Second  and  Third  Bases 

One  or  none  out.     (See  Team  Plays  10  and  11.) 
Two  out.     Throw  to  first  base. 

Runners  on  First,  Second,  and  Third  Bases 

One  or  none  out,  (See  Team  Plays  i,  2,  3,  4, 
and  5.) 

Two  out.  Throw  to  first  base  or  make  the 
easiest  force-out. 


THE  THIRD-BASEMAN ;•'•. ,    '  ,      loi 

Runners  on  First  and  Third  Bases 

One  or  none  out.     (See  Team  Plays  6, 7, 8,  and  9.) 
Two  out.     Throw  to  first  base. 
AlwaySy  as  the  batsman  takes  his  position,  decide 
what  you  will  do  if  the  hall  is  hit  to  you. 


VII 

THE  OUTFIELDER 

The  outfielder  is  expected  to  do  more  than  be- 
come adept  at  catching  ordinary  fly  balls.  He 
should  be  able  to  cover  all  the  ground  in  his  sec- 
tion on  all  sides  of  him.  He  should  put  in  at 
least  two-thirds  of  his  time  catching  flies  that 
are  over  his  head.  (If  he  cannot  find  anybody 
to  hit  the  ball  over  his  head  during  practice  while 
he  is  in  his  usual  position,  he  should  come  in 
closer,  so  as  to  make  the  ordinary  fly  balls  go  over 
his  head.)  What  is  needed  is  the  practice  of 
turning  and  running  back  while  the  ball  is  in  the 
air,  and  stopping  in  time  to  turn  again  to  catch 
it.  To  be  able  to  catch  these  long  flies  requires 
a  great  deal  of  practice,  but  the  ability  is  worth 
much  work — as  this  kind  of  a  ball  generally  goes 
for  several  bases  when  allowed  to  get  away. 

In  catching  fly  balls,  do  not  time  the  ball;  that 
is,  do  not  so  regulate  your  speed  as  to  arrive  at 
the  place  where  the  ball  will  fall  at  just  the  mo- 
ment when  it  lands.     It  is  safer  to  run  as  fast  as 

I02 


THE  OUTFIELDER  103 

possible,  get  directly  under  the  ball,  and  wait  for 
it  to  come  down.  Get  started  fast  after  the  ball, 
as  every  fraction  of  a  second  lost  means  a  great 
deal.  Practise  getting  started  "with  the  crack  of 
the  bat,"  that  is,  the  instant  that  the  ball  is  hit 
start  in  its  direction.  After  a  great  deal  of  prac- 
tice, it  will  become  natural  and  easy  for  you  to 
start  in  the  right  direction  instantly.  When  you 
know  that  you  can  get  the  ball,  call  out  to  the  other 
fielder Sy  "Mine''  or  "/  have  it.''  The  outfielder 
should,  when  it  is  possible,  catch  fly  balls  in  a  posi- 
tion from  which  it  is  easy  to  return  the  ball  to 
the  infielder  without  loss  of  time.  For  instance, 
if  a  player  after  catching  a  ball  has  to  change  the 
position  of  his  feet  and  shift  his  whole  body  be- 
fore he  can  throw  it,  it  is  quite  evident  that  he 
will  on  occasion  lose  valuable  time. 

When  the  ball  is  being  returned  from  the  out- 
field to  the  home-base  to  retire  a  runner,  it  should 
reach  the  catcher  on  the  first  bound — landing  ten 
or  fifteen  feet  in  front  of  the  plate.  This  prevents 
all  overthrows,  and  gives  the  catcher  a  better  op- 
portunity of  handUng  the  ball.  Lon^  throws  from 
right  field  to  third  base  should  reach  the  base  on 
the  first  bound — using  a  long  bound  to  give  the 
baseman  a  chance  to  handle  it.  Fielders  should 
constantly  practise  throwing  the  ball  to  bases  and 
home-plate  on  the  first  bound.     The  ability  to 


104  BASEBALL 

make  this  throw  accurately  and  swiftly  will  pre- 
vent many  a  stolen  base. 

Always  warm  your  arm  up  well  before  going 
into  a  game;  then  when  you  are  called  upon  to 
throw  to  the  plate,  you  can  do  so  without  injur- 
ing your  arm.  But  don't  wait  until  you  go  to 
the  outfield  before  warming  up;  while  you  are 
waiting  for  your  turn  in  batting  practice,  play 
catch,  and  exercise  your  arm. 

Figure  out  ahead  of  each  play  what  you  will  do 
with  the  ball  if  it  is  hit  to  you.  This  is  the  most 
important  rule  in  baseball  (and  appHes  to  each 
one  of  the  nine  players  on  the  field)  and  should 
never  be  disregarded.  By  following  this  rule, 
you  will  save  time,  and  your  plays  will  be  correct; 
if  you  wait  until  you  get  the  ball  before  thinking 
what  to  do  with  it,  you  will  blunder,  or  play  so 
slowly  that  you  lose  the  man. 

Do  not  rob  other  fielders  of  balls  that  they  can 
easily  catch.  Many  collisions  between  fielders 
result  from  a  desire  to  cover  too  much  ground. 
If  the  ball  is  hit  between  two  fielders,  both  should 
start  instantly  for  it — the.  man  who  can  most 
handily  get  it  calling  out,  "Mine;"  then  the  other 
withdraws  and  lets  him  take  it.  When  your 
neighboring  fielder  is  going  back  after  a  fly,  you 
can  often  assist  him  by  calling  out  when  you  think 
it  is  time  for  him  to  turn  to  catch  the  ball. 


THE  OUTFIELDER  105 

Relaying  The  Ball  to  the  Home-Plate 

Left-fielder.  If  the  ball  is  hit  past  the  outfield 
so  that  the  left-fielder  can  best  recover  it,  the 
centre-fielder  should  cross  over  arid  place  himself 
in  a  position  to  relay  the  ball  to  the  infield,  the 
short-stop  backing  up  the  latter  fielder  and 
directing  him  where  to  throw  the  ball  (while 
the  second-baseman  covers  second  base).  (See 
Diagram  IV,  page  200.) 

Centre-fielder.  If  the  ball  is  hit  past  the  out- 
field so  that  the  centre-fielder  can  best  recover 
it,  either  the  left-fielder  or  right-fielder  who  can 
most  handily  do  so  should  place  himself  in  posi- 
tion to  relay  the  ball  to  the  infield.  Either  the 
short-stop  or  second-baseman  should  back  up 
and  direct  the  play — leaving  the  other  to  cover 
second.  The  position  of  the  ball  will  determine 
who  is  to  assist  in  the  relay  and  who  is  to  cover 
second  base.  (See  Diagrams  V  and  VI,  page 
201.) 

Right-fielder.  If  the  ball  is  hit  past  the  outfield 
so  that  the  right-fielder  can  best  recover  it,  the 
centre-fielder  should  relay  the  ball  to  the  infield — 
the  second-baseman  backing  up  and  directing  the 
play  (while  the  short-stop  covers  second  base). 
(See  Diagram  VII,  p.  202.) 

(On   long-hit  balls,  in  which  a  relay  is  neces- 


io6  BASEBALL 

sary  from  one  outfielder  to  another,  throw  the 
ball  at  the  fielder  assisting  you  in  the  relay,  not 
over  his  head,  or  fifteen  or  twenty  feet  either  side 
of  him.)  Relaying  the  ball  to  the  plate  and  in- 
field should  be  practised  constantly. 

Backing  Up  Bases 

Outfielders  should  always  back  up  their  respec- 
tive bases;  i.  e.,  the  left-fielder  takes  care  of  third 
base;  centre-fielder  takes  care  of  second  base; 
and  the  right-fielder  first  base.  By  backing  up 
a  base  is  meant  standing  fifty  feet  back  of  the 
base  in  line  with  the  throw.  In  backing  up  a 
base,  an  outfielder  should  start  in  instantly  as 
the  ball  is  thrown  toward  that  base;  but  in  case, 
for  instance,  that  he  sees  a  man  stealing  as  the 
pitcher  is  throwing  to  the  batter,  he  should  not 
leave  his  position  until  the  ball  is  either  hit  or  in 
the  catcher's  hands.  (Otherwise  the  ball  might 
be  hit  into  the  place  which  he  has  left  vacant.) 

The  left-fielder  should  back  up  third  base  on 
all  throws  from  the  catcher  to  third,  on  all 
throws  from  the  right-fielder  to  third,  and  on 
all  throws  from  first  to  third.  He  can  be  ready 
on  throws  from  first  to  second.  (See  Diagrams 
II,  VI,  VII,  VIII,  and  XII,  pages  199-204.) 

The  centre-fielder  should  back  up  second  base 
on  all  throws  to  that  base  from  the  pitcher  and 


THE  OUTFIELDER  107 

catcher.  (See  Diagrams  II,  III,  VIII,  and  XII, 
pages  199-204.) 

The  right-fielder  should  back  up  first  base  on 
throws  to  first  base  from  the  catcher  and  pitcher — 
and  throws  from  third  to  first  and  on  bunts  thrown 
to  first — and  he  should  back  up  second  base,  on 
throws  from  third  to  second  on  doubles.  (See 
Diagrams  I  and  VIII,  pages  199  and  202.) 

It  is  the  duty  of  outfielders  to  come  in  fast 
and  back  up  the  infield  on  all  balls  hit  there  (as 
well  as  on  all  balls  thrown  to  bases  to  retire  run- 
ners). (See  Diagrams  II  and  VIII,  pages  199  and 
202.)  Run  over  close  to  your  neighboring  fielder 
when  he  is  catching  a  fly;  then,  if  necessary,  you 
can  coach  him  as  to  where  to  throw  the  ball. 

If  two  fielders  are  going  after  a  fly  ball  which 
goes  over  their  heads,  one  should  chase  the  ball 
while  the  other  runs  toward  the  diamond  to  help 
relay  the  ball  to  the  infield. 

Always  take  the  wind  into  consideration  (its 
direction  and  velocity)  in  catching  flies  and  in 
throwing  the  ball  in  to  the  infield.  ' 

It  is  a  good  plan  frequently  to  throw  dirt  or  grass 
up  in  the  air  to  find  out  what  you  can  about  the 
wind.  When  the  wind  is  blowing  in  toward  the 
diamond,  play  a  short  field — that  is,  nearer  than 
usual  to  the  infield.  This  kind  of  wind  will  hold 
the  ball  up  in  the  air,  thus  allowing  you  time  to 


io8  BASEBALL 

go  back  and  get  fly  balls,  while  by  playing  close 
you  can  cut  off  many  short  outfield  hits. 

When  the  wind  is  blowing  from  the  diamond 
toward  the  outfield,  play  a  deep  field — that  is, 
a  good,  long  distance  from  the  infield  (depending 
on  how  strong  the  wind  is  and  on  the  ability  of 
the  batter),  as  the  ball  will  be  carried  farther  than 
ordinarily. 

When  the  wind  is  across  the  diamond,  allow 
for  balls  "carrying"  with  the  wind.  When  the 
sun  is  shining  in  your  eyes,  use  smoked  glasses, 
or  shade  the  eyes  with  the  gloved  hand  (with 
the  arm  extended).  Do  not  look  toward  the  sun 
except  when  you  have  to — look  at  the  grass  or 
anywhere  but  into  the  sun.  Of  course,  you  must 
always  know  where  the  ball  is  and  get  ready 
as  the  pitcher  takes  his  position  to  pitch. 

It  is  necessary  that  all  fielders  have  plenty  of 
practice  handhng  balls  that  are  hit  on  the  ground, 
as  they  are  much  harder  to  field  than  the  aver- 
age fly  ball.  Be  sure  to  get  your  body  directly 
in  front  of  the  ball,  especially  if  it  is  hard  hit. 
Be  content  with  stopping  this  kind  of  a  ball — 
you  will  thereby  prevent  extra  bases,  which  will 
result  if  the  ball  gets  past  you.  If,  however,  the 
tying  or  winning  run  is  on  first  or  second  base 
and  the  ball  is  hit  hard  on  the  ground  to  the  out- 
fielder, he  should  play  it  like   an   infielder,  that 


THE  OUTFIELDER  109 

is,  pick  it  up  as  cleanly  and  quickly  as  possible 
and  return  it  to  the  infield. 

A  very  difficult  ball  to  judge  is  a  line  drive — 
that  is,  a  fly  ball  that  goes  almost  on  a  straight 
line  from  the  bat  to  the  outfielder  (without  going 
high  into  the  air).  Fielders  should  get  a  great 
deal  of  practice  on  these  balls,  for  if  one  is  mis- 
judged it  usually  results  in  a  home  run  for  the 
batter. 

Fielders  should  practise  coming  in  fast  on 
ground  balls,  as  the  rapid  handling  of  them  often 
means  shutting  off  runs  at  the  plate. 

It  should  be  uppermost  in  every  fielder's  mind 
to  get  the  ball  away  from  him  as  rapidly  as  pos- 
sible, but  intelligently. 

Batters  who  choke  their  bats  (that  is,  who 
shorten  the  hitting  end  of  the  bat)  seldom  hit 
long  drives;  therefore  play  in  for  them. 

Learn  to  play  according  to  individual  batters. 
Remember  where  each  batter  hits,  and  shift 
your  position  accordingly.  Right-handed  bat- 
ters generally  make  their  long  hits  in  left  field 
and  left  centre  field;  left-handed  batters  make 
theirs  in  right  and  right  centre  field.  Generally, 
on  left-handed  batters  the  left-fielder  can  play 
in  a  little  toward  the  infield,  because  these  batters 
seldom  make  long  hits  into  left  field.  Of  course 
there  are  left-handed  batters  who  hit  equally  well 


no  BASEBALL 

in  any  direction;  but  this  fact  is  readily  dis- 
covered and  can  be  guarded  against  by  the  fielders. 

When  you  are  playing  according  to  the  battery 
signals,  do  not  disclose  that  fact  by  changing 
your  position  before  the  pitcher  delivers  the  ball 
to  the  batter. 

When  there  is  one  or  none  out  and  a  man  on 
third,  with  one  run  needed  to  win,  drop  long 
foul  flies  that  are  too  far  to  be  thrown  to  the 
plate.  The  outfield,  when  their  side  is  two  or 
more  runs  ahead,  should  not  take  desperate 
chances  of  retiring  the  runner  at  home-plate;  they 
should  return  the  ball  to  the  infield  in  such  a  way 
as  to  prevent  the  other  runners  from  advancing. 
For  instance,  if,  while  there  are  three  men  on  the 
bases  and  the  side  in  the  field  is  two  or  more 
runs  ahead,  the  ball  is  hit  (either  in  the  air  or  on 
the  ground)  so  that  the  fielder,  upon  recovering 
it,  sees  that  he  cannot  very  readily  throw  home 
in  time  to  retire  the  runner  there,  he  should  throw 
to  third  base;  but  if  that  base  cannot  be  reached 
by  the  ball  in  time  to  head  off  a  runner,  he  should 
throw  to  second  base. 

With  the  score  standing  as  above,  and  a  runner 
on  first  and  third,  if  a  fly  ball  is  caught  by  an  out- 
fielder, unless  he  is  within  easy  throwing  distance 
of  home-plate,  he  should  throw  to  second  to 
hold  the  runner  on  first.  If  the  ball  is  a  base-hit, 
he  should  throw  to  third  base  to  prevent  the 


THE  OUTFIELDER  in 

runner  from  going  from  first  to  third.  If  it  is 
more  than  a  base-hit,  it  should  be  played  accord- 
ing to  directions  above  for  "  Relaying  the  Ball  to 
the  Home-Plate." 

In  all  other  conditions  (with  the  score  as  above) 
the  runner  who  is  going  home  should  be  disre- 
garded, if  he  cannot  be  readily  caught,  and  the 
ball  thrown  to  prevent  the  most  advanced  runner 
from  gaining  another  base. 

When  the  score  is  close,  toward  the  last  of  the 
game,  every  eflFort  should  be  made  to  retire  the 
runner  going  home.  During  the  early  part  of 
the  game  desperate  chances  should  not  be  taken 
to  prevent  a  man  from  scoring,  as  this  will  usually 
allow  other  runners  to  advance  within  scoring 
distance. 

In  the  last  half  of  the  last  inning  (one  or  none 
out),  when  the  runner  on  third  base  will  win  the 
game  if  he  scores,  the  outfielders  should  come 
in  toward  the  infield  within  easy  throwing  dis- 
tance of  home-plate.  In  this  case  a  hit  will 
score  the  man  anyway;  a  fly  ball  over  the  fielders' 
heads  will  score  the  man  (for  even  if  caught  it 
cannot  be  returned  in  time  to  head  the  runner  off 
at  home),  whereas  any  fly  ball  caught  can  be 
thrown  home  to  catch  the  runner;  and  then,  when 
playing  in  this  way,  the  outfielder  may  catch 
many  line  drives  which  otherwise  would  be  base- 
hits. 


VIII 
BATTING 

It  IS  entirely  unnecessary  to  dwell  upon  the 
importance  of  batting  in  baseball;  suffice  it  to 
say  that  if  a  man  hopes  ever  to  become  a  good 
ball  player  he  must  bat  well.  To  some  players 
batting  comes  naturally;  by  others  it  is  learned 
only  with  great  patience  and  courage — determina- 
tion. It  is  a  very  true  saying  that  **  Batters  are 
born  and  not  made/'  That,  of  course,  refers  to 
natural  batters.  There  is  no  such  a  thing  as  de- 
veloping good  batters  out  of  men  who  have  poor 
eyes  for  batting  and  bad  form  in  swinging  at  the 
ball.  These  men  can  be  corrected  as  far  as  their 
general  faults  go — their  batting  can  be  improved; 
but  it  is  a  rare  exception  to  the  general  rule  if  one 
becomes  a  good  hitter.  Otherwise,  why  would  the 
major  leagues  spend  thousands  and  thousands 
of  dollars  each  year  buying  new  men  who  can 
bat,  and  letting  once  valuable  men  go  who  have 
fallen  off  in  their  batting?  If  batters  could  be 
made,  why  wouldn't  managers  keep  their  own 
players  and  develop  their  batting,  instead  of  let- 


BATTING  113 

ting  them  go  (after  probably  paying  large  sums 
for  them  originally)  ?  However,  if  players  start 
early  enough  they  can  overcome  many  of  their 
faults,  and  can  go  through  the  mechanical  part 
of  batting — their  eyes  must  furnish  the  rest. 
Most  batters  can  improve  with  careful  study  and 
practice. 

The  following  suggestions  should  be  of  assis- 
tance to  players  who  are  interested  in  batting: 

Learn  to  stand  up  to  the  plate  without  fear  of 
being  hit  by  the  ball.  Remember  that  the  pitcher 
is  trying  to  throw  the  ball  over  the  plate  and  not 
at  you.  All  pitchers  put  their  greatest  efforts 
into  controlHng  the  ball,  and  to  hit  a  batter  is 
considered  poor  control;  therefore  never  worry 
about  being  hit.  If  a  speedy  ball  comes  directly 
at  you,  step  away,  always  watching  the  ball; 
but  if  a  half-speed  ball — or  one  which  you  can 
easily  tell  is  not  meant  for  a  fast  one — comes  at 
you,  keep  your  position  and  be  ready  to  hit  it, 
because  in  all  probability  it  will  be  a  curve  which 
will  break  over  the  base.  Do  not  let  the  pitcher 
drive  you  away  from  the  plate.  Determine  just 
what  position  is  best  for  you  to  take — and  keep  it. 
If  the  pitcher  throws  fast  balls  close  to  your  body, 
do  not  whirl  away,  turning  your  back  to  the  ball; 
for  if  you  do  you  will  let  many  curved  balls  go 
over  the  base.     The  safest  way  on  the  close  ball 


114  BASEBALL 

is  to  step  away  from  the  plate,  if  possible  keeping 
the  back  leg  stationary,  all  the  while  facing  the 
pitcher,  with  the  bat  ready  to  hit  the  ball  if  it 
comes  over  the  plate. 

Hold  the  bat  firmly  in  both  hands,  keeping 
your  elbows  away  from  your  sides  so  as  to  swing 
freely  (thus  avoiding  the  awkward,  cramped  swing 
which  is  so  ineffective)  and  using  a  vigorous  snap 
of  the  forearms. 

Keep  the  back  foot  firmly  on  the  ground. 

Your  step  forward  and  swing  should  be  made 
both  at  the  same  time  (or  as  nearly  so  as  possible). 
The  greatest  difficulty  to  overcome  is  that  of 
stepping  too  quickly.  By  stepping  too  quickly 
you  make  the  step  and  the  swing  two  separate 
motions  at  different  times;  this  makes  it  difficult 
for  you  to  hit  the  ball. 

Another  difficulty  is  that  of  stepping  too  far. 
If  you  take  a  very  long  stride,  you  naturally  lower 
the  plane  in  which  you  hit — ^you  virtually  become 
shorter  than  when  you  take  a  smaller  stride — 
and  balls  which  the  umpire  will  call  strikes  will 
be  high  for  you.  These  difficulties  can  be  over- 
come by  watching  yourself,  thinking  constantly, 
and  persistently  trying. 

Never  swing  at  the  ball  with  all  your  power — 
for  the  harder  you  swing  the  more  likely  you  are 
to  miss  the  ball,  since  you  take  your  eye  ofF  the 


BATTING  115 

ball  by  the  viciousness  of  your  effort.  Learn  to 
take  a  steady,  true  swing,  bringing  the  bat  around 
in  a  plane  parallel  to  the  ground,  and  keeping  your 
eye  on  the  ball.  Hit  at  the  ball  where  you  see 
it  is — not  where  you  guess  it  is. 

Hitting  ability  depends  a  great  deal  upon  the 
strength  of  the  forearms  and  wrists,  as  the  bat 
is  brought  around  faster  if  the  forearms  are  used; 
therefore,  develop  them.  Early  in  the  season 
swing  three  bats  as  often  as  possible,  and  just 
before  going  to  bat  swing  three.  In  addition  to 
actually  strengthening  the  wrists,  swinging  three 
bats  immediately  before  going  up  to  hit  makes 
the  one  bat  seem  much  lighter  and  more  easily 
handled  against  speed. 

A  most  important  element  in  batting  is  timing 
the  pitcher's  motion.  By  some  regular  motion 
of  your  body  or  bat,  get  into  the  rhythm  of  the 
pitcher's  swing.  Do  this  while  you  are  standing 
waiting  for  your  turn,  as  well  as  when  you  are  at 
bat.  The  batter  should  also  study  the  combina- 
tions of  balls  which  the  pitcher  uses;  for  instance, 
whether  he  depends  chiefly  upon  curves  or  fast 
balls;  whether  the  first  ball  is  usually  straight 
or  curved;  whether  he  is  using  a  change  of  pace, 
and  how.  • 

Get  into  the  habit  of  hitting  ahead  of  you — 
meet  the  ball  well  in  front  of  you.     By  so  doing 


Ii6  BASEBALL 

you  will  be  the  aggressor,  Instead  of  waiting  to 
see  what  the  ball  will  do  and  generally  hitting 
too  late. 

Do  not  try  to  hit  all  balls  into  one  field.  If 
you  are  right-handed,  pull  close  balls  into  left 
field,  and  drive  wide  balls  into  right  field  (and  vice 
versa  if  you  are  a  left-handed  batter).  If  you 
are  known  to  hit  regularly  into  one  particular 
section  of  the  field,  you  will  observe  that  the  op- 
posing fielders  shift  into  that  section.  You  may 
be  sure  that  the  pitcher  knows  of  your  tendency 
to  hit  into  that  particular  field  and  that  he  will 
pitch  probably  to  your  weakness  (that  is,  he  will 
try  to  make  you  hit  the  ball  in  a  direction  which 
is  unusual  for  you).  For  instance,  suppose  that 
you  are  a  right-handed  batter  and  that  you  hit 
all  (or  nearly  all)  balls  to  left  field.  The  outfield 
and  infield,  when  you  are  at  bat,  will  shift  toward 
left  field;  and  the  pitcher  will  try  to  keep  the 
ball  away  from  you — that  is,  on  the  outside  cor- 
ner of  the  base.  Now,  if  you  are  intelligent  you 
will  realize  all  this;  and,  instead  of  trying  to  pull 
the  outside  ball  to  left  field,  you  will  try  to  push 
it  to  right  field,  which  the  fielders^  in  shifting^  have 
left  unprotected. 

Many  batters  fail  to  hit  the  ball  successfully 
because  they  lower  their  bat  and  hit  up  at  the 
ball,  the  only  ball  they  can  hit  at  all  being  a 


BATTING  117 

very  low  one  (this  will  be  very  evident  to  the 
pitcher,  who  will  keep  them  all  high).  Keep  the 
bat  and  the  weight  of  the  body  as  far  as  possible 
above  the  ball,  hitting  down  at  it  rather  than  up, 
but  preferably  in  a  plane  parallel  with  the  ground. 
Keep  the  weight  of  the  body  on  the  back  leg, 
which  should  be  well  braced.  Don't  squat  or 
bend  your  knees  to  hit  a  low  ball;  rather  keep  the 
back  leg  almost  stiff  and  "golf"  or  "cricket"  the 
ball. 

A  right-handed  batter,  especially,  should  avoid 
hitting  hard  at  the  ball,  for  such  a  motion  will 
throw  him  away  off  his  stride  in  starting  for  first 
base;  he  will  have  to  lose  valuable  time  in  recov- 
ering himself  for  his  run  to  first.  Use  the  arms, 
forearms,  and  wrists. 

Don't  use  a  bat  that  feels  heavy  in  your  hands; 
use  one  that  you  can  snap  ahead  of  a  fast  ball. 
Do  not  be  afraid  of  striking  out;  take  a  good, 
steady,  hard  swing  at  the  ball  (that  does  not  mean 
striking  with  all  your  might) ;  then,  if  you  hit  it,  it 
will  go  far  enough.  If  you  are  afraid  of  missing 
it  and  only  hit  half-heartedly,  you  will  either  miss 
it  entirely  or  knock  a  miserable  little  "roller." 

Only  natural  hitters  should  use  long  bats — a 
man  who  has  a  good  eye  for  judging  both  speed 
and  curves  can  grasp  his  bat  by  the  end;  but 
the  ordinary  batter  will  get  better  results  by  using 


ii8  BASEBALL 

a  short  bat  or  by  grasping  a  long  bat  four  or 
five  inches  from  the  handle  (choking  it).  This 
shorter  bat  enables  him  to  follow  the  ball  closely 
with  his  eyes  while  he  snaps  the  bat  around  to 
meet  the  ball. 

Many  batters  hit  late  at  the  ball  because  they 
make  two  motions  of  their  swing;  that  is,  they 
wait  until  the  ball  has  left  the  pitcher's  hand 
before  drawing  the  bat  back  to  swing;  then  they 
jerk  it  back  and  swing  forward — too  late  to  meet 
the  ball  squarely.  Keep  the  bat  well  behind 
you  and,  as  the  pitcher  throws  the  ball,  make 
but  one  motion  and  that  toward  the  ball,  meet- 
ing it  in  front  of  the  plate. 

When  stepping  forward  to  hit,  point  the  toe  of 
the  front  foot  into  the  diamond — otherwise  you 
will  be  oflP  your  balance  if  the  ball  comes  on  the 
inside  corner  of  the  plate,  and  naturally  you 
cannot  hit  it.  (If  a  batter  does  not  point  his  toe 
into  the  diamond  when  he  steps,  a  close  ball  will 
make  him  lift  his  toes  and  fall  back,  rising  on  his 
heels.) 

Take  your  step  and  get  the  bat  ready  to  hit 
every  ball  pitched.  Don't  assume  too  early  that 
the  ball  will  be  bad  and  then  stand  there  unpre- 
pared to  hit  it  if  it  should  go  over  the  base. 

A  right-handed  batter  should  hit  a  left-handed 
pitcher's  fast  ball  with  confidence,  since  this  ball 


COMPLETIOX  OF  A   CORRECT  SWING  IN  HITTING. 

The  batter  has  maintained  such  poise  as  to  have  avoided  the  vice  of  throwing 
himself  off  balance  and  of  turning  his  back  toward  the  pitcher. 


BATTING  119 

breaks  away  from  the  batter;  a  left-handed  bat- 
ter has  the  same  advantage  over  a  right-handed 
pitcher. 

A  very  good  practice  is  that  of  standing  in  the 
batter's  position  whenever  a  pitcher  is  throwing 
to  a  catcher  (it  isn't  even  necessary  for  you  to 
have  a  bat  in  your  hands)  and  decide  which  balls 
you  would  hit  at  and  which  you  would  let  go  by. 
This  is  good  training  for  the  eye. 

A  batter  who  can't  hit  a  close  ball  should  not 
stand  near  the  base,  as  by  so  doing  he  makes 
even  good  balls  close.  He  should  get  away  from 
the  plate — a  foot  if  necessary;  then  any  ball  that 
looks  close  will  be  inside  of  the  base  and  conse- 
quently not  a  strike.  And  again,  if  a  batter  likes 
a  close  ball  but  can't  hit  a  wide  one,  he  should 
hug  the  plate,  that  is,  put  his  feet  as  close  to  the 
plate  as  the  umpire  will  let  him. 

Most  batters  have  certain  weak  spots,  that  is, 
they  have  difficulty  in  hitting  the  ball  if  it  is 
thrown  in  certain  places,  or  in  certain  ways. 
Many  batters  cannot  hit  a  ball  that  looks  as 
though  it  were  going  to  hit  them  but  curves  over 
the  base;  many  batters  have  an  irresistible  im- 
pulse to  hit  at  high  balls;  weaknesses  of  this  na- 
ture can  be  overcome  to  a  great  degree  by  con- 
stant practice  and  thinking.  If  you  can't  hit  a 
curved  ball,  go  out  on  the  field  early  every  day 


I20  BASEBALL 

and  have  somebody  throw  curve  ball  after  curve 
ball  at  you;  gradually  you  will  become  accus- 
tomed to  that  kind  of  a  ball  and  it  will  lose  its 
terror  for  you.  If  you  can't  resist  a  ball  that  is 
high  (and  you  find  that  you  can't  hit  it),  have  a 
player  throw  plenty  of  high  balls  at  you — but 
let  them  all  go.  This  practice  will  generally 
break  the  spell  which  the  high  ball  has  over  you. 
If  there  are  other  points  at  which  you  are  not 
strong,  put  special  attention  on  just  these  points 
until  you  can  control  them. 

When  taking  your  position  to  bat  (with  a 
runner  on  first  base)  you  can  often  tell  who  will 
cover  second  base  by  the  distances  from  the  base 
which  the  short-stop  and  second-baseman  are 
playing.  So,  if,  for  instance,  you  are  a  left-field 
hitter  and  the  short-stop  is  playing  well  back  for 
you,  try  to  hit  to  the  right  on  the  hit-and-run 
play  (since  the  second-baseman  will  be  covering 
second). 

'  Bunting 

The  importance  of  successful  bunting  cannot 
be  overemphasized.  Many  games  are  won  and 
lost  either  by  the  ability  or  inability  of  the  players 
to  bunt.  Bunting  is  one  of  the  first  things  to  be 
learned  by  a  ball  player;  he  should  spend  hour 
after  hour  if  necessary  in  practising  it,    and  he 


BATTING  III 

should  continue  to  practise  it  throughout  his 
career,  never  allowing  himself  to  become  weak  at  it. 

Bunting  means  allowing  the  bat  to  be  struck 
by  the  ball  in  such  a  way  that  it  will  roll  slowly 
on  the  ground  into  the  diamond.  When  intend- 
ing to  bunt,  be  sure  to  conceal  your  intention  as 
long  as  possible.  And  the  most  successful  way 
to  do  this  is  to  develop  a  bunting  motion  that  is 
as  near  Uke  your  hitting  motion  as  you  can  make 
it.  Hold  the  bat  as  though  you  were  going  to 
hit;  then,  as  the  pitcher  delivers  the  ball,  take 
your  usual  step,  bringing  the  bat  forward  with  the 
body,  the  hands  spread  apart  five  or  six  inches, 
gripping  the  bat  loosely,  and  holding  it  parallel 
to  the  ground.  In  directing  the  ball  to  the  left 
or  right,  the  hand  which  has  been  run  out  toward 
the  middle  of  the  bat  should  be  used  as  a  pivot 
while  the  other  turns  the  bat.  If  the  ball  is  low, 
the  bat  should  not  be  dropped  to  meet  it;  the  body 
should  be  bent  as  you  carry  the  bat  down  to  meet 
the  ball,  in  this  way  following  the  course  of  the 
ball  closely. 

When  you  are  called  upon  to  make  a  sacrifice 
bunt,  remember  that  the  primary  reason  for  your 
doing  so  is  to  advance  the  base-runner,  and  not  to 
put  yourself  safely  on  first  base.  Therefore  stand 
there  and  bunt  the  ball  before  you  think  of  any- 
thing else.     {For  direction  when  to  make  the  saC' 


122  BASEBALL 

rifice  hunt  see  Team  Play  19.)  When  you  are 
called  upon  to  make  a  sacrifice  bunt,  pick  out  a 
good  hall!  This  is  the  only  time  when  the  batter 
can  control  the  bat  in  such  a  way  as  to  let  all  bad 
balls  go  by;  therefore,  when  bunting,  be  sure 
that  the  ball  is  over  the  base  between  the  shoulder 
and  the  knee. 

A  fast  runner  can  diversify  his  style  of  play 
while  at  bat  (when  there  are  no  runners  on  bases), 
either  by  bunting  the  ball  or  using  the  drag-hit 
(see  Team  Play  21)  and  trying  to  beat  the  ball 
to  first  base.  Then  the  next  time  he  comes  up 
to  bat  the  infield  will  probably  play  in  for  him, 
thus  increasing  his  opportunity  of  hitting  safely. 
Frequently  even  a  slow  runner,  when  the  infield 
is  playing  back,  can  bunt  and  reach  first  base 
safely.  The  batter  should  always  be  ready  to 
do  the  unexpected  thing;  it  will  then  be  difficult 
for  opponents  to  diagnose  his  intentions.  If  the 
batter  is  to  sacrifice  a  runner  from  second  to  third, 
and  the  opposing  short-stop  is  holding  the  runner 
close  to  second  (being  about  to  attempt  Team 
Play  15),  the  batter,  using  his  own  judgment,  or, 
upon  receiving  a  signal  from  his  manager,  can 
hit  the  ball  through  short-stop,  as  that  position 
is  left  open.  (This  play  ought,  however,  to  be 
left  to  the  discretion  of  the  individual  captain  or 
manager.) 


BATTING  123 

The  Hit-and-Run  Play 

See  Team  Play  22. 

When  the  sign  for  the  hit-and-run  play  is  given, 
the  batter  should  make  every  possible  effort  to 
hit  the  ball  if  it  is  within  reach  of  his  club.  But 
if  the  ball  is  completely  out  of  his  reach,  the 
batter  might  just  as  well  let  it  go  (for  the  fact 
that  he  merely  swings  at  it  won't  bother  the 
catcher). 

Whenever  a  batter  has  two  strikes,  he  should 
not  hit  at  a  bad  ball  to  help  a  base-runner  who  is 
stealing  a  base,  especially  when,  with  two  out,  the 
runner  is  going  from  first  to  second. 

The  Squeeze  Play 

See  Team  Play  23. 

In  order  to  make  this  play  successfully,  learn 
to  bunt ! 

The  batter  should  practise  giving  signals  in  an 
easy,  natural  manner,  and  in  order  to  conceal  his 
signals  he  should  be  constantly  making  motions 
that  have  nothing  to  do  with  his  particular  signals. 

When  the  batter  (with  no  strikes)  sees  that 
the  runner  on  second  base  is  going  to  steal  (unless 
he  is  playing  the  hit-and-run)  he  may  at  times 
make  a  feint  to  bunt  the  ball,  thus  drawing  the 
third-baseman  off  his  base. 


124  BASEBALL 

The  batter,  when  leading  off  in  an  inning,  or 
at  any  other  time  when  there  are  no  runners  on 
bases  and  none  out,  should  generally  take  one 
strike  before  hitting  at  the  ball  (that  is,  he  should 
deliberately  allow  a  strike  to  be  called  on  him). 
If  there  are  three  balls  against  the  batter,  he 
should  take  two  strikes  before  hitting.  By 
adopting  this  method  the  batter  will  frequently 
force  the  pitcher  to  give  him  four  balls. 

With  no  one  on  base  and  one  or  two  out,  the 
batter  should  try  to  get  the  pitcher  in  the  hole 
(that  is,  get  the  advantage  over  him  in  balls  and 
strikes)  and  then  should  be  ready  to  hit  the 
next  ball.  The  reason  for  doing  this  is  that  the 
batter  will  be  fairly  sure  of  getting  a  good  ball 
as  soon  as  the  pitcher  is  in  the  hole. 

When  there  is  a  runner  on  second  and  third 
base,  or  second  or  third,  the  batter  with  two  balls 
and  no  strikes  should  not  take  a  strike  but  should 
hit  the  first  good  ball.  Even  with  three  balls 
and  no  strikes  it  is  frequently  considered  advis- 
able to  hit  the  next  good  ball,  especially  if  the 
batsman  is  a  good  hitter.  Of  course,  a  batsman 
who  is  not  a  good  hitter  should  always  try  to  get 
a  base  on  balls. 


A  slide  of  just  enough  velocity  to  bring  the  right  foot  to  the  base. 


A  slide  of  such  velocity  as  to  carry  the  body  widely  off  the  base-line 
THE  FALL-AWAY  SLIDE. 


IX 

BASE-RUNNING 

The  Importance  of  Getting  Started  from 
THE  Home-Plate 

The  distance  from  home  to  first  base,  although 
actually  ninety  feet,  is  really  much  longer  than 
the  distance  between  any  of  the  other  bases  for 
the  runner.  The  truth  of  this  statement  will  be 
apparent  when  one  realizes  that,  while  runners 
on  other  bases  often  get  as  much  as  twelve  or 
thirteen  feet  leads  before  the  ball  is  even  thrown 
to  the  batter,  the  batter  starts  flat-footed  right 
from  the  plate.  Even  to  the  left-handed  batter, 
who  has  the  advantage  over  the  right-handed 
batter,  the  distance  is  long — at  most  he  can  get 
but  a  single  step  as  the  ball  is  hit — while  the  right- 
handed  batter  always  has  more  than  ninety  feet 
to  run. 

The  right-handed  hatter,  being  at  a  disadvantage 
compared  with  the  left-handed  batter  (as  far  as 
getting  to  first  base  is  concerned),  should  reduce 
his  swing  as  much  as  possible — because  as  he 
swings  he  throws  himself  farther  away  from  first 
base. 

"S 


126  BASEBALL 

The  left-handed  batter  throws  himself  toward 
first  base  as  he  swings,  and  therefore  has  three 
or  four  steps  advantage  over  the  right-handed 
batter. 

Batters  should  always  "run  out"  all  hit  balls  at 
top  speed.  Often  what  seems  like  a  sure  out  will 
result  in  the  batter's  being  safe  at  first  if  he  will 
but  go  down  the  base-line  fast.  Learn  to  touch 
the  base  with  either  foot  as  you  continue  your 
stride  across  the  base — do  not  jump  at  the  base 
on  the  last  step;  continue  a  steady,  swift  stride. 
On  all  fly  balls  and  balls  that  are  hit  safely,  instead 
of  continuing  straight  ahead  over  first  base,  begin 
at  about  twenty  feet  from  the  plate  and  go  out  of 
the  base-line,  circling  around  before  crossing  the 
base,  turning  the  base  sharply,  thus  getting  a  run- 
ning start  for  second.  (By  making  this  turn  at 
first  base — see  Diagram  XIII,  page  205 — you  will 
be  enabled  to  run  to  second  without  circling  far 
outside  of  the  base-lines.)  Then  if  the  fly  ball  be 
dropped  you  are  in  a  position  to  go  to  second — 
if  the  base-hit  be  fumbled,  you  are  ready  to 
stretch  the  single  into  a  two-base-hit;  if  it  be  a 
short  two-base-hit,  you  can  make  it  with  greater 
certainty  than  if  you  were  to  overrun  first  base. 

When  on  base,  always  follow  the  ball  closely; 
never  step  off  the  base  until  you  know  exactly 
where  the  ball  is — you  will  always  have  plenty  of 


BASE-RUNNING  127 

time  to  get  your  lead  as  the  pitcher  takes  his  po- 
sition on  the  rubber.  (This  is  a  most  important 
rule,  and  the  best  players  are  frequently  put  out 
when  they  disregard  it.)  Another  safe  rule  to 
follow  is  that  of  not  trying  to  take  your  lead  off 
the  base  when  the  pitcher  is  standing  out  of  his 
box. 

When  returning  to  first  base,  keep  your  eyes 
on  the  ball.  (The  pitcher  may  snap  it  to  first  if 
you  aren't  looking.) 

The  Lead  off  First  Base 

It  is  generally  conceded  that  the  most  impor- 
tant part  of  base-running  is  the  lead  off  the  base 
and  the  quick  start.  And  the  distance  which 
the  base-runner  can  go  from  the  base  while  the 
pitcher  is  in  possession  of  the  ball  can.  only  be 
determined  by  the  individual  runner  after  much 
practice.  A  left-handed  pitcher  usually  compels 
the  runner  to  stay  closer  to  first  base  than  does  a 
right-handed  pitcher,  since  the  former  faces  the 
base  and  can  throw  either  to  the  batter  or  to  first 
with  almost  the  same  motion. 

The  lead  off  first  base  depends  first  of  all  upon 
the  runner's  ability  to  slide  back  to  the  base 
when  the  pitcher  throws  to  catch  him.  A  great 
deal  of  time  should  be  spent  in  practising  the 
slide  back    to    first    base — sometimes    feet    first, 


128  BASEBALL 

sometimes  head  first.  And  in  games  it  will  be 
discovered  that  on  some  pitchers  a  longer  lead 
can  be  taken  than  on  others;  the  lead  can  be 
increased  proportionately — always  determined  by 
the  runner's  ability  to  return  safely  to  the  base. 
At  the  same  time,  it  is  absolutely  necessary  that 
the  runner  be  able  to  go  in  either  direction — back 
to  the  base  or  on  to  second;  therefore  get  off  just 
as  far  as  you  can,  always  being  able  to  return 
safely,  or  go  to  second  as  the  pitcher  makes  his 
motion  to  throw.  A  good  lead  is  necessary  whether 
you  intend  to  steal  or  not. 

The  Quick  Start 

In  base-stealing,  as  well  as  in  base-running  gen- 
erally, success  depends  not  only  on  a  big  lead, 
but  upon  the  quick  start — that  is,  getting  started 
as  soon  as  possible  before  the  ball  leaves  the 
pitcher's  hand  as  he  makes  his  motion  to  deliver 
the  ball  to  the  batter.  Almost  all  pitchers  make 
a  motion  with  some  part  of  the  body  (arm,  head, 
shoulder,  foot,  etc.)  that  betrays  the  fact  that 
they  will  throw  to  the  batter.  A  careful  study  of 
the  pitcher  will  disclose  this  motion,  a  knowledge 
of  which  will  be  of  great  assistance  to  the  base- 
runner.  When  you  are  going  to  steal  a  base  or 
play  the  hit  and  run,  look  for  this  motion,  and 
as  soon  as  you   see   it   start  for  the  next  base. 


BASE-RUNNING  129 

(Much  may  be  gained  by  close  observation  fron^ 
the  bench  when  you  are  not  at  bat.) 

The  Fall-Away  Slide 

(See  cut  facing  page  130.)  In  gaining  any  base 
(except  in  running  from  home  to  first)  or  returning 
to  any  base  when  there  is  a  possibility  of  being 
put  out,  the  runner  should  slide  feet  first.  (SHd- 
ing  head  first  offers  too  great  an  opportunity  for 
the  baseman  to  block  the  runner  off  the  base.) 
What  is  called  the  fall-away  slide  is  the  most 
effective.  The  fall-away  slide  is  one  wherein  the 
runner  approaching  a  base  throws  his  body  out  of 
the  base-line,  landing  on  his  side,  and  hooking  the 
base  with  the  foot  of  the  uppermost  leg,  sliding 
on  the  under  leg  bent  beneath  him.  Some  play- 
ers slide  on  the  under  leg  extended,  but  in  this 
case  great  care  must  be  exercised  not  to  catch  the 
spikes  of  the  heel  of  the  under  foot  in  the  ground. 
(Many  wrenched  ankles  result  from  catching  the 
heel  spikes  in  the  ground  while  sliding.)  When 
sliding  back  to  first  base,  the  runner  falls  to  his 
left,  sliding  on  his  left  leg  bent  beneath  him,  and 
hooking  the  base  with  the  instep  or  toe  of  the 
right  foot. 

Every  baseball  player  should  know  how  to  use 
the  fall-away  slide.  The  first  consideration  in 
learning  this  slide  is  a  pair  of  sUding  pads — cov- 


I30  BASEBALL 

ering  for  the  hips — to  prevent  the  skin  from  being 
burned  by  the  friction.  Then  picly  out  a  place 
where  the  soil  is  soft;  use  some  kind  of  a  stationary 
base  at  which  to  sHde,  and  begin  by  taking  short 
runs  at  the  base.  Do  not  jump  directly  at  the 
base,  but  endeavor  to  slide  away  from  it,  catch- 
ing the  base  with  the  toe  of  the  foot  which  is 
uppermost.  When  sHding  to  the  left,  hook  with 
right  toe — and  when  sliding  to  the  right,  use  the 
left  toe.  The  advantage  of  this  slide  is  that  the 
baseman  has  only  a  small  portion  of  your  body 
to  touch  with  the  ball — that  is,  your  foot  which 
you  hook  to  the  base  as  your  body  falls  away. 
It  is  a  great  advantage  to  a  base-runner  to  be  able 
to  slide  on  both  sides.  For  instance,  if  he  is 
steahng  second,  and  the  catcher  throws  the  ball 
low  (he  can  tell  by  watching  the  baseman's  hands) 
a  slide  to  the  left  would  put  him  in  an  easy  posi- 
tion to  be  tagged;  while  if  he  slid  to  the  right 
he  would  be  getting  out  of  the  way  of  the  base- 
man.    On  a  high  throw  either  slide  would  do. 

It  is  rarely  necessary  to  slide  to  first  base  when 
running  from  home.  It  is  doubtful  whether  any 
time  is  really  saved;  it  certainly  makes  the 
umpire's  decision  more  difficult,  and  most  man- 
agers discourage  it; 

Only  continual  practice  will  tell  a  player  how 
far  from  the  base  he  should  begin  his  sHde.    The 


BASE-RUNNING  131 

only  safe  way  is  to  run  at  full  speed  and  practise 
hooking  the  base;  if  your  speed  carries  you  past 
the  base,  do  not  lessen  your  speed  but  begin  your 
slide  sooner,  that  is,  farther  from  the  base.  It 
is  always  very  dangerous  to  slacken  your  speed 
before  sliding;  many  broken  ankles  have  resulted 
when  runners  have  attempted  to  slow  up  and 
then  slide. 

A  base-runner,  when  stealing  a  base,  should  not 
look  back  toward  the  catcher.  Such  an  action 
is  certain  to  lessen  the  runner's  speed  somewhat. 
He  should  get  his  start,  run  with  all  his  speed — 
eyes  riveted  on  the  base  and  the  man  covering 
it — and  slide  when  he  is  within  striking  distance. 

He  should  practise  getting  up  on  his  feet  with 
all  possible  speed  after  he  has  slid  to  a  base,  to 
take  advantage  of  any  misplay  that  may  offer 
him  opportunity  to  go  to  the  next  base. 

In  stealing  second  base,  always  get  a  good  lead, 
but  do  not  communicate  to  the  pitcher  and 
catcher  the  fact  that  you  intend  to  steal.  (If 
you  do,  they  will  work  the  pitch-out  sign  to  catch 
you  at  second,  or  the  pitcher  will  keep  throwing 
to  first  to  hold  you  close  to  the  base.)  It  is  well, 
even  when  you  do  not  intend  to  steal,  to  get  a 
good  big  lead — being  ready,  of  course,  to  return 
to  the  base  at  the  slightest  motion  of  the  pitcher. 
(Fast  base-runners  in  this  way  often  worry  the 


132  BASEBALL 

pitcher  into  giving  bases  on  halls  to  the  batters.) 
If  the  ball  is  hit  when  you  are  attempting  to  steal, 
try  to  follow  the  ball  with  your  eyes,  especially 
if  it  is  a  fly  ball.  If  the  ball  is  hit  safely,  use  your 
judgment  and  try  to  go  to  third  base;  of  course, 
if  it  is  a  short  safe  hit,  or  directly  into  a  fielder's 
hands,  only  try  to  draw  the  throw  to  third  by 
rounding  second  sharply  as  if  intending  to  con- 
tinue on  to  third.  (Sometimes  the  fielder,  in  try- 
ing to  "head  you  ofF"  at  third,  will  make  an 
overthrow  to  that  base.)  If  it  is  a  fly  ball,  stop 
between  the  bases — ready  to  go  to  second  if  it 
is  dropped,  or  back  to  first  if  caught.  Good  judg- 
ment will  have  to  be  used  to  decide  how  far  from 
first  to  play  as  the  ball  is  caught.  For  instance, 
if  the  ball  is  hit  to  left  field,  the  runner  can  safely 
play  half-way  to  second,  since,  even  if  the  ball  is 
caught,  he  can  return  in  safety  to  first  base;  but 
if  a  fly  ball  is  hit  to  short  right  field,  he  cannot 
play  very  far  off  the  base,  as  a  quick  throw  to 
the  base  might  beat  him  back  to  it,  completing 
a  double  play. 

Base-Runner  on  First 

When  on  first  base  with  none  out,  the  runner, 
expecting  the  batter  to  bunt,  should  be  on  the 
alert;  for  if  the  batter  misses  the  ball,  the  catcher 
is  apt  to  return  the  ball  sharply  to  the  first-base- 


BASE-RUNNING  133 

man  or  to  the  second-baseman,  who  has  come  in 
behind  and  covered  first  base.  Therefore,  if  the 
ball  is  not  hit  by  the  batter,  be  ready  to  return 
quickly  to  first  base — all  the  while  watching  the 
catcher,  who  has  the  ball. 

Three  strikes  on  the  batter,  when  there  is  one 
or  no  one  out,  puts  him  out;  don't  think  you  are 
forced  to  run  if  the  catcher  drops  the  third  strike. 

One  out.  In  this  case  the  runner  may  steal 
without  assistance  from  the  batter,  or  work  with 
the  batter  in  the  hit-and-run  play  (as  he  may  do 
also  with  none  out). 

When  a  runner  is  on  first  base,  he  should  do 
all  in  his  power  to  avoid  being  involved  in  a 
double  play.  The  greater  the  lead  he  can  get 
before  the  ball  is  hit,  the  greater  are  his  chances 
of  reaching  second  before  the  ball  can  be  played 
there.  It  is  for  this  reason  that  the  hit-and-run 
play  is  used;  even  when  the  ball  isn't  hit  safely, 
it  must  be  fielded  very  sharply  to  shut  the  man 
off  at  second.  And  when  the  ball  is  hit  safely, 
frequently  the  great  start  will  enable  the  man  who 
was  on  first  to  go  to  third,  especially  if  the  ball 
is  hit  to  right  field. 

When  the  hit-and-run  signal  is  given  (see  Hit- 
and-Run  Signals,  Team  Play  22),  get  your  accus- 
tomed lead  off  first,  and  start  as  though  you  were 
going   to    steal   clean — don't    depend    upon    the 


^^ 


134  BASEBALL 

batter's  hitting  the  ball.  If  he  misses  it,  take 
your  fade-away  slide  into  second  with  all  your 
speed.  If  the  batter  does  hit  the  ball,  take  a 
quick  look  at  the  ball.  If  in  your  judgment  you 
can  go  to  third  base,  do  so,  always  calculating 
on  your  own  speed  and  the  ability  of  the  fielder 
to  throw.  If,  when  occupying  first,  second,  or 
third,  a  long  fly  ball  is  hit  which  you  think  is  far 
enough  away  to  permit  your  advancing  a  base 
when  it  is  caught,  return  to  the  base  you  are 
occupying  and  start  for  the  next  base  instantly 
as  the  fielder  catches  the  ball.  Here  careful  judg- 
ment must  be  used  by  the  base-runner  taking  into 
consideration  his  own  speed,  the  position  of  the 
ball,  and  the  fielder's  throwing  ability.  Of  course, 
with  two  out,  the  runner  should  continue  to  ad- 
vance, regardless  of  the  position  of  ball,  etc. 

Two  out.  Whenever  the  runner  is  fairly  fast 
he  should  steal  second  (except  when  the  pitcher 
is  batting,  for  if  the  runner  is  caught  at  second, 
the  pitcher  will  have  to  start  the  batting  in  the 
next  inning).  But  if  the  side  be  several  runs  be- 
hind— where  one  run  won't  make  much  difference 
in  the  score — the  runner  should  play  safely,  wait- 
ing for  a  hit  to  send  him  around. 

It  is,  of  course,  not  advisable  generally  to  steal  on 
the  first  ball  pitched,  for  it  is  hkely  to  be  a  waste 
ball  thrown  on  purpose  to  catch  him  at  second. 


BASE-RUNNING  135 

When  it  is  possible,  steal  when  the  pitcher  is 
in  the  hole;  that  is,  when  there  are  several  balls 
and  fewer  strikes  on  the  batter. 

Base-Runner  on  Second  (or  First 
AND  Second) 

First  of  all — watch  the  ball.  When  the 
pitcher  has  it — and  is  in  his  box — then  the  runner 
can  safely  take  his  lead.  The  lead  off  second 
should  be  such  that  the  runner  can  get  back  to 
the  base  safely  when  the  pitcher  turns  to  throw  to 
that  base.  And  the  runner  should  never  go  hack  to 
the  base  unless  the  pitcher  turns  toward  second;  then 
he  should  slide  back  to  the  base.  It  is  bad  baseball 
for  a  runner  to  take  such  a  big  lead  off  second 
base  that  he  is  constantly  worrying  about  being 
caught.  The  short-stop  will  continually  try  to 
drive  the  runner  back  to  the  base  by  feinting  to 
go  to  the  base;  for  instance,  the  pitcher  will  look 
over  his  shoulder  at  the  runner,  and  as  he  does 
so  the  short-stop  will  start  as  though  to  cover 
second,  whereupon  the  runner  (if  he  has  a  big 
lead)  will  start  back  to  second  a  step  or  two — 
possibly  more;  at  that  instant  the  pitcher  will 
throw  to  the  batter,  leaving  the  runner  going 
back  to  second.  And  if  the  batter  hit  safely, 
the  runner  will  probably  be  thrown  out  at  the 
plate,  whereas  he  would  have  scored  had  he  been 


136  BASEBALL 

going  toward  third  instead  of  back  to  second 
when  the  ball  was  hit. 

Another  instance  in  which  it  is  fatal  to  be  driven 
back  toward  second  base  is  the  following: 

Suppose  you  are  on  second  base — no  one  out — 
and  your  side  wants  a  run  badly,  and  the  batter 
intends  to  sacrifice  you  to  third.  The  pitcher  will 
look  back  at  you,  the  short-stop  going  all  the  way 
to  second;  then,  as  you  return  to  second,  the 
pitcher  puts  a  nice  ball  over  the  base;  the  bat- 
ter bunts,  the  pitcher  or  first-baseman  fields  the 
ball,  and  you  are  thrown  out  at  third  base — 
just  because  you  allowed  yourself  to  be  driven 
back  to  second  (when  the  pitcher  did  not  turn 
to  throw  to  that  base).  Therefore,  never  return 
to  second  or  start  that  way — unless  the  pitcher 
turns  around  to  throw  there.  Take  a  good  lead 
but  let  it  be  such  that  it  will  enable  you  to  go 
back  to  the  base  safely  when  the  pitcher  does 
throw  to  catch  you;  then  you  will  always  be 
ready  to  advance  toward  third  on  the  pitcher's 
motion  as  he  delivers  the  ball  to  the  plate. 

Runner  on  Second 

None  out.  The  base-runner,  if  possible,  should 
observe  the  catcher's  signals  (caUing  for  the  fast 
or  curve  ball)  and  by  some  prearranged  signal, 
such  as  a  motion  of  the  hand  or  foot,  should  com- 


BASE-RUNNING  137 

municate  to  the  batter  what  kind  of  a  ball  is 
coming. 

A  bunt  may  be  expected,  especially  if  the  batter 
IS  a  weak  hitter.  Play  safely,  don't  take  many 
chances.  Don't  be  "bluffed"  back  to  second.  On 
a  short,  clean  hit  turn  third  swiftly  and  be  ready 
to  score  in  case  of  the  ball  being  fumbled.  If 
the  ball  is  fielded  cleanly,  feint  to  go  home,  thus 
drawing  a  throw  to  the  home-plate,  which  will 
allow  the  batter  to  go  to  second. 

One  out.  Take  a  good  lead  and  score  on  a  hit. 
Be  ready  for  hit-and-run  play,  but  stop  between 
the  bases  on  a  fly  ball  to  the  outfield.  A  speedy 
man  occasionally  can  get  a  good  lead  and  steal 
third — always  being  on  the  alert,  however,  not  to 
give  away  the  intention  of  stealing — and  ready  to 
return  to  second  if  the  pitcher  turns.  It  is  well 
not  to  get  into  the  habit  of  depending  on  the 
coachers  to  keep  you  informed  as  to  what  the 
short-stop  and  second-baseman  are  doing.  Watch 
the  pitcher,  and  be  able  to  return  if  he  throws  to 
catch  you.  (In  a  game  where  excitement  among 
the  spectators  runs  high,  it  is  impossible  to  hear 
the  coachers  anyway.) 

If,  on  a  hit  to  the  infield,  with  no  one  on  first, 
you  are  clearly  caught  at  third,  don't  run  to  that 
base  to  be  tagged  out — run  up  and  down  between 
the  bases,  allowing  the  batter  time  to  go  to  second. 


138  BASEBALL 

When  a  long  fly  ball  is  hit,  return  to  your  base 
and,  calculating  on  your  own  speed,  etc.,  try  to 
go  to  third  as  the  fielder  catches  the  ball — remem- 
bering to  slide,  as,  of  course,  since  you  are  not 
forced,  the  baseman  must  touch  you. 

Watch  every  opportunity  to  go  to  third  on  a 
passed  ball  or  on  error. 

Two  out.  Score  on  all  hit  balls.  Do  not  at- 
tempt to  steal  third  unless  you  can  do  so  easily 
without  risk,  for  you  can  score  from  second  on  a 
hit  as  well  as  from  third. 

Runner  on  Third 

When  occupying  third  base,  play  outside  of  the 
base-line,  because  a  ball  which  hits  you  there 
will  not  put  you  out,  for  you  will  be  on  foul  ground. 

Always  lead  well  up  the  base-line  on  the  pitcher's 
delivery  so  as  to  score  on  a  short  passed  ball  or 
any  other  misplay.  But  do  not  run  away  up  the 
base-line  upon  the  pitcher's  wind-up  motion,  and 
then,  as  he  delivers  the  ball  to  the  batter,  start 
back  to  third,  knowing  that  you  are  beyond  your 
safe  distance.  By  doing  this  you  lose  all  oppor- 
tunity to  score  on  a  misplay,  because  you  are  going 
in  the  wrong  direction. 

Never  leave  third  base  (unless  there  are  two 
out)  on  any  kind  of  a  long  fly  or  line  hit  to  the 
outfield  until  you  see  that  the  ball  is  either  caught 


BASE-RUNNING  139 

or  dropped  or  is  a  base-hit.  //  it  is  a  base-hit  you 
can  almost  walk  home  safely;  if  the  fly  is  dropped, 
you  can  score  easily;  and  if  the  fly  is  caught,  you 
are  in  a  position  to  score  after  the  catch.  Many 
base-runners  start  home  on  line  drives  or  fly  balls 
that  are  caught.  They  are  therefore  compelled 
to  return  and  touch  third  after  the  ball  is  caught, 
thus  throwing  away  their  opportunity  to  score; 
for  the  fielder,  with  this  assistance  on  the  runner's 
part,  can  easily  get  the  ball  home  ahead  of  the 
runner. 

None  out.  Play  safely.  If  the  infield  is  play- 
ing in  close  to  get  you  at  the  plate  and  the  ball 
is  hit  to  an  infielder,  do  not  try  to  score;  let  him 
throw  the  batter  out  at  first  (you  will  have  two 
chances  left  in  which  to  score).  But  if  the  infield 
is  playing  deep,  your  chances  to  score  are  in- 
creased— especially  on  a  slow  hit  ball;  then  take 
a  chance  at  scoring. 

If  there  is  a  man  on  third  and  one  on  second 
— none  out — and  the  game  is  nearing  its  close, 
and  the  run  on  third  is  the  winning  run,  the  man 
on  third  should  come  home  fast  on  the  hit;  for 
if  he  is  caught  at  the  home-plate  the  man  on 
second  will  go  to  third,  and  his  run  can  yet  win 
the  game.  On  the  other  hand,  if  two  runs  are 
needed  to  win  (under  the  above  conditions),  play 
safely,   letting   the  fielder  throw  the  batter  out 


I40  BASEBALL 

at  first,  and  leaving  second  and  third  occupied  by 
runners  as  before  the  hit. 

One  out.  If  the  ball  is  hit  to  the  infield,  go 
home  at  top  speed;  but  if  you  are  plainly  out  at 
home,  stop  and  run  up  and  down  the  line,  com- 
pelling the  catcher  and  third-baseman  to  make 
as  many  throws  as  possible;  thereby  enabling  the 
batter  to  reach  second  base  before  you  are  put 
out.  (The  batter  must  watch  for  this  play,  and 
lose  no  time  in  getting  to  second  base,  from 
which  position  he  can  score  on  a  base-hit.) 

Two  out.  Get  a  good  lead — be  going  toward 
home  as  the  ball  is  pitched  (be  ready  to  return  to 
third  if  the  catcher  throws  there)  and  watch  for 
the  slightest  opportunity  to  score. 

Sometimes,  if  the  pitcher  has  a  long,  slow 
wind-up,  a  speedy  man  can  steal  home  by  getting 
a  fast  start  as  the  pitcher  winds  up. 

Score  on  all  hit  balls,  whether  they  are  hit  on 
the  ground  or  in  the  air. 

Runners  on  First  and  Third 

With  the  bases  occupied  in  this  manner,  it  is 
usually  a  case  of  the  man  on  third  out-guessing 
the  catcher.  (When  several  runs  behind,  play 
safely  and  wait  for  the  hit  to  score  you.) 

There  are  several  ways  of  playing  the  man  on 
third  to  score: 


BASE-RUNNING  141 

(i)  As  the  man  on  first  starts  for  second,  the 
man  on  third  starts  for  home.  Then,  if  the  catcher 
throws  to  second — whether  the  throw  be  inter- 
cepted by  the  second-baseman  or  not — the  man  on 
third  can  score  easily.  Of  course,  if  the  catcher 
only  feints  to  throw  and  holds  the  ball  (or  throws 
to  the  pitcher),  the  man  is  clearly  out  at  home. 
That  is  the  chance  that  must  be  taken.  (It  is 
a  play  that  is  usually  made  by  slow  runners,  and 
is  either  a  very  successful  one  or  a  flat  failure.) 

(2)  The  man  takes  a  good  lead  off  third  and, 
as  the  man  on  first  starts  for  second,  notes  what 
the  catcher  does.  If  the  catcher  throws  to  second, 
he  dashes  for  the  plate.  (The  success  of  this  play 
depends  upon  the  speed  of  the  runner  and  the 
manner  in  which  the  ball  is  thrown  from  the  plate 
and  returned  to  it.) 

(3)  If  one  run  is  needed  very  badly  and  there 
are  two  out  (with  a  poor  batter  up),  the  following 
play  may  be  attempted :  The  runner  on  first  takes 
an  unusually  big  lead  (the  man  on  third,  observing 
the  lead,  diagnoses  the  play  and  is  ready  to  do 
his  part) ;  then,  if  the  pitcher  throws  to  first,  the 
man  starts  for  second;  on  the  instant  that  the 
first-baseman  draws  his  arm  back  to  throw  to 
second  the  man  on  third  runs  for  home.  The 
same  play  may  be  made  somewhat  differently: 
While  the  pitcher  has  the  ball  the  runner  starts 


142  BASEBALL 

for  second;  then,  as  the  pitcher  turns  to  throw 
to  second,  the  man  scores  from  third. 

On  all  of  the  above  plays  (except  when  there 
are  two  out),  if  the  man  is  clearly  out  at  home, 
he  should  stop  and  run  up  and  down  the  line  be- 
tween home  and  third  to  give  the  runner  from 
first  time  to  get  to  third. 

Whenever  there  are  more  runners  than  one  on 
bases,  each  runner  should  always  watch  the  man 
ahead.  If  he  goes  to  the  next  base,  he  should  be 
followed  by  the  man  behind  him,  as  the  head 
runner  will  usually  attract  the  attention  of  the  op- 
ponents. The  following  misplay,  where  three  hits 
and  no  runs  are  made  in  one  inning,  is  frequently 
made  because  the  second  man  on  base  fails  to 
watch  the  man  ahead  of  him:  First  man  up  singles; 
second  man  singles  (men  on  first  and  second,  no 
one  out) ;  the  third  man  up  makes  a  short,  clean 
hit  to  the  outfield,  the  man  on  second  stops  at 
third;  while  the  man  who  was  on  first  continues 
on  to  third,  thinking  (without  looking  to  see)  that 
the  man  ahead  of  him  is  scoring.  Of  course,  the 
man  who  was  on  first  is  put  out.  The  next  man 
up  hits  into  a  double  play. 

The  Delayed  Steal 

(See  Team  Play  24.)  This  play  is  made  by  a 
runner  on  first  base.    It  can  be  made  successfully 


BASE-RUNNING  143 

only  against  a  catcher  who  works  automatically, 
that  is,  who  catches  and  returns  the  ball  to  the 
pitcher  without  watching  the  runner.  The  runner 
on  first  takes  a  good  lead  but  does  not  start  for 
second  until  the  catcher  has  the  ball;  then,  just  as 
the  catcher  is  making  his  motion  of  returning  the 
ball  to  the  pitcher,  the  runner  starts  for  second — 
before  the  ball  has  left  the  catcher's  hand.  The 
catcher  must  then  draw  his  arm  back  again  to 
throw  to  second,  taking  a  full  swing.  The  short- 
stop and  second-baseman  are  often  caught  un- 
prepared. 

Coaching  on  First  and  Third  Bases 

Although  the  coacher  cannot  touch  the  runner, 
yet  it  is  very  important  that  there  be  men  sta- 
tioned on  the  coaching  lines  at  first  and  third 
bases  to  give  instructions  to  the  runners.  Third- 
base  coaching  is  the  more  important,  very  fre- 
quently games  being  won  or  lost  according  to  the 
judgment  of  this  coacher.  It  is  advisable  to  use  a 
set  of  signals  given  by  motion  of  the  hands  in 
directing  the  play  of  a  runner  coming  to  third 
base.  He  must  be  told  either  to  slide  to  third,  or 
stop  there,  or  continue  home. 

The  position  of  a  man  coaching  on  third  base 
should  not  be  in  a  direct  line  between  second  and 
third  but  at  a  point  ten  or  fifteen  feet  from  third 


144  BASEBALL 

toward  home-base.  From  this  position  he  will 
be  able  to  watch  at  the  same  time  the  runner  and 
the  ball.  As  soon  as  possible  the  coacher  should 
decide  whether  or  not  it  is  safe  to  send  the  runner 
home  and  should  instantly  direct  him  accordingly. 
He  must  know  the  game  thoroughly,  and  must 
have  a  quick  eye  to  judge  distances  and  a  quick 
brain  in  giving  directions.  He  should  only  let  the 
man  score  when,  in  his  judgment,  the  stage  of 
the  game  or  inning,  speed  of  runner,  and  position 
of  ball  justify  the  attempt. 

First-Base  Coacher's  Remarks  to  the 
Runner,  First  Base  Occupied 

"Hold  your  base  until  the  pitcher  is  on  the 
rubber." 

"Get  a  good  lead." 

"Look  out  for  a  throw  from  the  catcher." 

"Watch  the  second-baseman  coming  in  behind 
you." 

"Stop  a  double  play." 

"Half-way  on  short  fly  balls." 

"Two  men  out,  run  on  everything  (hit)." 

"Go  to  second  on  a  long  fly." 

Coacher's  Remarks,  Second  Base  Occupied 

"Watch  the  ball." 

"Lead  up  with  the  pitcher's  motion." 


BASE-RUNNING  145 

"Don't  go  back  unless  the  pitcher  turns  to 
throw." 

"Half-way  on  close  fly  balls/' 

"No  one  out,  play  it  safe." 

"Steal  on  a  long  fly  to  right  field." 

"One  out — get  the  jump  and  score  on  a  hit." 

"Two  out — score  on  everything." 

Coacher's  Remarks,  Third  Base  Occupied 

"Hold  the  base  until  pitcher  gets  on  the  rubber." 

"Follow  the  pitch." 

"Keep  on  foul  ground." 

"Be  ready  for  a  short  passed  ball." 

"Hold  your  base  on  fly  balls  to  outfield." 

"No  one  out — play  it  safe." 

"One  out — score  on  infield  hit." 


X 

TEAM  PLAYS 

The  Reasons  for  the  Infield  Assuming 
Various  Positions  on  the  Diamond 

When  the  entire  infield  is  playing  back  there 
is  a  comparatively  small  space  through  which  the 
ball  can  be  hit  safely  (on  the  ground).  Nearly 
all  balls  that  are  not  "line  drives,"  that  is,  balls 
hit  with  terrific  speed,  are  readily  handled  by 
the  infielders.  And  even  on  very  hard  hit  balls 
the  short-stop  and  second-baseman  are  able  to 
cover  considerable  ground;  of  course,  the  farther 
back  the  first-baseman  and  third-baseman  play, 
the  more  ground  they  can  cover.     (See  Diagram 

IX,  page  203.)  Take,  for  instance,  Team  Play 
No.  I,  following,  where,  with  three  on  base,  the 
entire  infield  plays  back.  Here  they  have  raised 
to  the  maximum  the  chances  of  stopping  all  hit 
balls  and  of  retiring  the  runners  either  singly  or 
by  double  plays. 

When  the  entire  infield  plays  in  (see  Diagram 

X,  page  203),  they  have  come  so  close  to  the  batter 
that  they  have  no  time  to  judge  hard  hit  balls — 

146 


TEAM  PLAYS  147 

and  unless  the  ball  be  hit  directly  at  them  they 
cannot  handle  it;  they  have  reduced  to  the  mini- 
mum their  abihty  to  cover  ground.  Therefore, 
with  a  man  on  third  (or  first,  second,  and  third, 
etc.),  instead  of  playing  in  at  all  times  to  prevent 
the  men  from  s.coring,  it  is  sometimes  wiser  to  al- 
low the  run  to  score  while  playing  back  in  hopes  of 
making  a  double  play — or  retiring  one  man  and 
preventing  more  than  one  run  from  scoring. 
We  will  take  up  Team  Play  No.  i  again.  Here,  if 
the  infielders  play  in  (when  their  side  can  spare 
two  runs  and  still  be  ahead)  and  try  to  cut  ofF 
one  man  at  the  plate,  they  run  grave  risks  of 
having  the  ball  hit  through  them,  scoring  two  men 
and  leaving  a  man  on  first  and  second  and  no  one 
retired  by  the  play. 

For  illustration  of  how  much  more  ground  the 
infield  can  cover  when  playing  back  than  while 
playing  in,  see  Diagram  XI,  page  204. 

In  play  No.  2  (following)  the  men  are  again 
shifted.  These  positions  combine  to  a  marked 
degree  the  efficiency  of  both  playing  back  and 
playing  in  (but  reducing  the  abiUty  of  the  first- 
baseman  and  third-baseman  to  cover  ground). 
Here  the  first-baseman,  third-baseman,  and  pitcher 
are  in  positions  either  to  retire  the  runner  at 
home-base  or  to  make  the  double  play,  while  the 
short-stop  and  second-baseman,  in  playing  back, 


148  BASEBALL 

are  protecting  their  team  against  the  ball's  being 
hit  through  their  positions;  that  is,  balls  on  their 
left  or  right  or  into  the  air,  which  they  could  not 
have  handled  had  they  been  playing  in.  The 
short-stop  and  second-baseman  are  also  in  position 
to  make  the  double  play.  In  Team  Play  5  the 
short-stop  and  second-baseman,  by  playing  only 
a  few  paces  back  of  the  base-line,  are  able  either 
to  make  the  double  play  at  second  and  first  or  to 
retire  the  runner  at  home  if  the  ball  be  hit  sharply 
at  them. 

The  supreme  object,  of  course,  is  to  win  the 
game;  this  can  be  done  as  well  by  one  run  as  by 
ten;  therefore  the  players  should  take  advantage 
of  everything  that  will  decrease  their  opponents' 
chances  of  obtaining  an  insurmountable  lead. 

The  directions  in  the  following  plays  have  all 
been  given  in  careful  consideration  of  these  prin- 
ciples. 

The  infielders,  in  assuming  their  positions,  should 
always  take  into  consideration  the  speed  of  the 
base-runners  and  the  hitting  tendencies  and  speed 
of  the  batsman.  The  left  side  of  the  diamond 
should  give  ground  before  a  hard  left-field  hitter; 
and  the  right  side  should  give  ground  before  a 
hard  right-field  hitter.  In  contemplating  making 
a  double  play,  the  infielders  should  move  in  a  few 
paces  if  the  base-runners  are  fast  men. 


TEAM   PLAYS  149 

In  the  following  plays  the  directions  to  the 
infield  to  "play  back"  or  "play  in'*  are  to  be 
construed  as  follows:  To  play  back  means  that 
the  first-baseman,  second-baseman,  short-stop, 
and  third-baseman  assume  their  positions  well 
back  of  the  base-lines — the  same  as  they  do  when 
there  are  no  runners  on  bases.  (See  Diagram  IX, 
page  203.)  To  play  in  means  that  these  infielders 
assume  their  positions  inside  of  the  diamond,  a 
few  paces  from  the  base-lines.  (See  Diagram  X, 
page  203.) 

Team  Plays 

(i)  When  the  team  in  the  field  is  three  or 
MORE  RUNS  AHEAD  and  the  opposing  side  has 
THREE  MEN  ON  BASES  (none,  One,  or  two  out),  the 
infield  should  play  back  at  all  stages  of  the  game, 
taking  the  chance  of  making  a  double  play.  (See 
Diagram  IX,  page  203.) 

(2)  When  the  team  in  the  field  is  TWO  runs 
AHEAD  and  the  opposing  side  has  three  men  on 
BASES  (none  or  one  out),  the  infield,  at  all  stages 
of  the  game,  should  play  as  follows:  The  first- 
baseman  (three  or  four  paces)  off  the  base,  and  a 
few  paces  back  of  the  base-Hne.  (If  the  batsman 
is  a  dead  right-field  hitter,  play  a  deeper  position.) 
The  first-baseman  should  make  his  double  play 
at  home  and  first,  if  possible.     The  third-base- 


I50  BASEBALL 

man  should  play  on  the  base-line,  making  his 
double  play  at  home  and  first,  if  possible.  (If 
the  batsman  is  a  hard  left-field  hitter,  move  back 
a  few  paces.)  The  short-stop  and  second-base- 
man should  play  back;  if  possible,  making  their 
double  play  at  second  and  first.  The  pitcher 
should  try  to  make  his  double  play  at  home  and 
first. 

When  two  are  out,  the  entire  infield  should  play 
back,  retiring  the  runner  at  the  easiest  base.  (See 
Diagram  IX,  page  203.) 

In  the  above  conditions,  some  teams  play  their 
first-baseman  on  the  base,  holding  the  runner  up. 
But,  on  the  pitcher^s  wind-up  motion,  both  the 
runner  and  the  baseman  move  away  from  the 
base;  and  since  the  baseman  is  in  motion  when 
the  ball  is  hit,  he  is  handicapped  in  covering 
ground  to  his  left.  On  the  other  hand,  by  play- 
ing off  his  base,  the  first-baseman  is  enabled  to 
cover  ground  on  both  sides,  at  the  same  time 
allowing  the  runner  only  an  ordinary  lead.  (If 
the  runner  persists  in  taking  a  big  lead,  he  can 
be  driven  back  by  throws  from  the  catcher.) 

(3)  When  the  team  in  the  field  is  one  run 
AHEAD  and  the  opposing  side  has  three  men  on 
BASE,  with  none  outy  the  infield  for  the  first  five 
innings  can  take  positions  and  play  the  same  as 
directed  in  play  No.  2.     After  the  fifth  inning  the 


TEAM  PLAYS  151 

entire  infield  should  play  in  to  retire  the  runner 
at  home.     (See  Diagram  X,  page  203.) 

In  the  above  conditions,  with  one  out,  play 
the  same  as  in  No.  2  for  the  first  seven  innings, 
after  which,  play  in.  (Some  teams  extend  this 
method  of  play,  with  one  out,  through  the  entire 
game;  short-stop  and  second-baseman  playing 
only  three  or  four  paces  back  of  the  base-line  to 
faciUtate  the  making  of  the  double  play.) 

When  two  are  out,  play  back. 

(4)  With  THREE  ON  BASE,  nofie  out,  and  the  score 
EVEN,  the  infield  can  play  for  the  first  five  innings 
the  same  as  directed  in  No.  2,  except  that  the 
first-baseman  plays  on  the  line  a  few  paces  ofF 
the  base.  (After  the  fifth  inning,  the  entire  in- 
field should  play  in  to  retire  the  runner  at  home.) 

With  one  out,  and  a  slow-running  batsman  at 
the  plate,  the  above  method  of  playing  back  may 
be  extended  for  a  few  more  innings. 

(5)  When  the  team  in  the  field  is  ONE  RUN 
BEHIND  and  the  opposing  side  has  three  men 
ON  base,  with  one  or  none  out,  the  infield  for  the 
first  five  innings  should  play  as  follows:  The 
first-baseman  on  the  line,  a  few  paces  from  the 
base;  third-baseman  on  the  base-line;  the  short- 
stop and  second-baseman  a  few  paces  back  of  the 
base-line.  (After  the  fifth  inning  the  infield 
plays  in  to  retire  the  runner  at  the  plate.) 


152  BASEBALL 

When  two  are  out,  play  back. 

(6)  When  the  team  in  the  field  is  three  runs 
AHEAD  and  the  opponents  have  a  runner  on 
FIRST  and  ONE  on  third,  the  first-baseman  should 
hold  the  runner  close  to  the  base,  while  the  rest 
of  the  infield  plays  back,  trying  for  the  double 
play  at  second  and  first.  Under  the  same  con- 
ditions, WHEN  THE  TEAM  IN  THE  FIELD  IS  TWO  RUNS 
AHEAD,  the  infield  can  play  the  same  as  above 
except  that  the  third-baseman  should  play  on  the 
line.  If  there  is  none  out,  the  runner  should  be 
retired  at  home  if  possible.  With  one  man  out, 
make  the  double  play  at  second  and  first  if  pos- 
sible. With  two  out,  third-baseman  moves  back 
— make  the  easiest  play — either  at  second  or 
first. 

(7)  When  the  team  in  the  field  is  one  run 
AHEAD  and  the  opposing  side  has  a  runner  on 
FIRST  AND  THIRD,  with  NONE  OUT,  the  infield  for 
the  first  five  or  six  innings  can  take  their  positions 
as  directed  in  No.  2,  except  that  here  the  first- 
baseman  always  holds  the  runner  close  to  the  base, 
moving  out  into  the  diamond  as  the  pitcher  throws 
to  the  batter.  Now,  however,  more  attention 
should  be  paid  to  the  runner  on  third,  and  he 
should  be  retired  at  home  if  possible.  (But  only 
by  the  first-baseman,  third-baseman,  or  pitcher.) 
If  the  runner  cannot   be   retired   at   home,   the 


TEAM  PLAYS  153 

double  play  at  second  and  first  should  be  tried 
for.  But  if  there  is  no  chance  of  getting  the  ball 
to  second  ahead  of  the  runner,  the  batter  should 
be  retired  at  first. 

After  the  fifth  or  sixth  inning  the  short-stop 
and  second-baseman  should  play  a  few  paces 
ahead  of  the  base-line  to  retire  the  runner  at 
home-plate  or  make  the  double  play,  at  the 
same  time  protecting  themselves  against  a  stolen 
base. 

When  the  bases  are  occupied  as  above  and  the 
score  is  the  same,  with  one  out,  the  short-stop 
and  second-baseman  play  back  for  the  first  seven 
innings.  After  that  they  should  play  in  to  retire 
the  runner  at  home-plate.  Some  teams  extend 
this  method  of  play — with  first  and  third  baseman 
in,  and  short-stop  and  second-baseman  three  or 
four  paces  back  of  the  base-Hne — when  one  is 
OUT — through  the  entire  game,  according  to  the 
speed  of  the  batter  and  the  possibility  of  involv- 
ing him  in  a  double  play.  This,  however,  must 
be  left  to  the  discretion  of  the  individual  manager 
or  captain.  When  two  are  out,  all  except  the 
first-baseman  play  back. 

(8)  When  the  score  is  tied  (even)  and  there 
is  a  runner  on  first  and  third — none  out — for 
the  first  five  innings  the  infield  should  play  as 
follows:   First-baseman  always  holds  the  runner 


154  BASEBALL 

close  to  the  base;  the  third-baseman  on  the  base- 
line; short-stop  and  second-baseman  three  or  four 
paces  back  of  the  line.  (After  the  fifth  inning, 
short-stop  and  second-baseman  move  in.) 

With  one  out,  short-stop  and  second-baseman 
play  back  for  seven  innings,  after  which  move  in. 
Two  out,  all  except  first-baseman  play  back. 

(9)  When  the  team  in  the  field  is  one  run  be- 
hind and  opposing  side  has  a  runner  on  first 
AND  THIRD,  the  first-baseman  should  remain  on 
his  base,  the  third-baseman  play  in,  and  in  the 
early  stages  of  the  game  short-stop  and  second- 
baseman  play  on  or  a  few  paces  back  of  the  base- 
line. Put  the  runner  out  at  home  if  possible; 
otherwise  try  to  make  the  double  play.  During 
the  last  part  of  the  game,  the  entire  infield  should 
play  in  to  retire  the  runner  at  home. 

(10)  When  the  team  in  the  field  is  three  runs 
AHEAD  and  the  opposing  side  has  a  runner  on 
second  and  third,  the  entire  infield  should  play 
back;  the  pitcher  or  third-baseman  can  sometimes 
retire  the  runner  at  home. 

With  the  bases  occupied  as  above,  when  the 
team  in  the  field  is  two  runs  ahead,  the  first-base- 
man should  play  oflF  the  base  about  half  the  dis- 
tance which  he  plays  when  no  one  is  on  base,  the 
third-baseman  should  play  on  the  base-line;  short- 
stop and  second-baseman  should  play  back.     In 


TEAM   PLAYS  155 

the  last  inning,  however,  when  one  or  two  are  out, 
the  infield  should  all  play  back.  (See  Diagram  IX, 
page  203.) 

(11)  When  the  team  in  the  field  is  one  run 
AHEAD  and  the  opposing  side  has  a  runner  on 
SECOND  AND  THIRD  (one  or  more  out),  for  the  first 
three  or  four  innings  the  first-baseman  should  play 
three  or  four  paces  off  the  base  on  the  base-Hne; 
short-stop  and  second-baseman,  half  their  regular 
distance  back  of  the  base-line;  the  third-base- 
man on  the  base-line.  (When  two  are  out,  play 
back.) 

After  the  fourth  inning  the  entire  infield  should 
play  in.  (When  two  are  out,  play  back.)  Even 
when  ONE  run  behind,  in  the  above  conditions, 
it  has  often  been  found  a  good  policy  to  play  the 
infield  half-way  back,  as  above,  during  the  early 
stages  of  the  game — especially  with  a  hard-hitting 
batsman  up  or  a  slow  runner  on  third. 

(12)  When  the  team  in  the  field  is  two  or 
MORE  RUNS  AHEAD  and  the  opposing  side  has  a 
runner  on  THIRD  BASE  only,  the  entire  infield 
should  play  back,  sacrificing  the  run  to  retire  the 
batter  at  first,  if  the  man  cannot  be  put  out  easily 
at  home.  But  when  one  run  ahead,  or  when 
BEHIND,  or  when  the  score  is  even  (one  or  none 
out),  the  infield  should  always  play  in  to  retire  the 
runner  at  the  home-plate.     When  two  are  out,  all 


IS6  BASEBALL 

play  back  to  retire  the  batter  at  first.  Under  all 
other  conditions,  with  the  tying  or  winning  run  on 
third,  the  infield  should  play  in. 

Summary   of  the   Above  Directions  to. the 
Team  in   the   Field 

(For  handy  reference,  letters  correspond  to  the 
numbers.) 

Before  using  the  following,  read  detailed  plays 
\   above. 

{a)  When  three  or  more  runs  ahead,  infield  play 
back. 

(b)  Three  on  Base.  fVhen  two  runs  ahead, 
one  or  none  out,  infield  play  as  follows:  first-base- 
man ofF  base  few  paces  back  of  line;  third-base- 
man on  line;  short-stop  and  second-baseman 
back.     Two  out,  all  play  back. 

(c)  When  one  run  ahead,  none  out,  for  the  first 
five  innings  play  as  in  h,  then  play  in.  One  out, 
play  as  in  b  for  seven  innings,  then  play  in.  Two 
out,  all  play  back. 

{d)  When  the  score  is  even,  none  oiit,  for  the 
first  five  innings  play  as  in  b,  then  play  in.  One 
out,  slow  batter,  play  as  in  b  for  six  or  seven 
innings.     Two  out,  all  play  back. 

(<?)  When  one  run  behind,  one  or  none  out,  for 
five  innings  first-baseman  off  base  on  line,  third- 
baseman  on  line,  short-stop  and  second-baseman 


TEAM  PLAYS  157 

few  paces  back  of  line.  After  fifth  inning  short- 
stop and  second-baseman  come  in.  Two  out,  all 
back. 

(/)  Runners  on  First  and  Third.  When  three 
or  more  runs  ahead,  first-baseman  hold  up  runner; 
rest  of  infield  play  back. 

When  two  runs  ahead,  play  as  above  with  third- 
baseman  in.  None  out,  retire  runner  at  plate,  if 
possible,  otherwise  double  play.  One  out,  same 
play.     Two  out,  all  except  first-baseman  back. 

{g)  When  one  ahead,  none  out,  first-baseman  on 
base,  other  players  same  as  b  for  five  or  six 
innings.  After  sixth  inning  short-stop  and  sec- 
ond-baseman a  few  paces  ahead  of  the  line.  With 
one  out,  short-stop  and  second-baseman  play 
back  for  seven  innings,  then  come  in. 

{h)  When  the  score  is  even,  none  out  (for  first  five 
innings),  third-baseman  on  the  line,  short-stop 
and  second-baseman  back.  After  the  fifth  inning 
short-stop  and  second-baseman  move  in.  With 
one  out,  short-stop  and  second-baseman  play  back 
for  seven  innings,  then  move  in.  Two  out,  all 
except  the  first-baseman  play  back.  The  first- 
baseman  must  always  under  these  conditions  hold 
the  runner  on  first. 

(z)  When  one  run  behind,  in  the  early  stages  of 
the  game,  third-baseman  in,  short-stop  and 
second-baseman  on  or  just  back  of  the  line,  the 


IS8  BASEBALL 

rest  of  the  game  play  in.  First-baseman  always 
holding  runner  on  first. 

(j)  Runners  on  Second  and  Third. — When 
three  runs  ahead,  play  back.  When  two  runs  ahead, 
first-baseman  half  back,  third-baseman  on  the 
line,  short-stop  and  second-baseman  back.  Last 
inning,  one  or  two  out,  all  back. 

{k)  When  one  run  ahead,  none  or  one  out,  for 
three  or  four  innings  first-baseman  on  the  line, 
short-stop  and  second-baseman  half-way  back  of 
line,  third-baseman  on  the  line.  After  the  fourth 
inning,  play  in.  When  one  run  behind,  for  first 
few  innings  play  as  above  if  batter  warrants  it. 

(/)  Runner  on  Third.  When  two  or  more  runs 
ahead,  play  back.  Under  all  other  conditions,  one 
or  none  out,  play  in;  two  out,  all  back. 

(13)  When  the  side  in  the  field  is  three  or 
MORE  RUNS  AHEAD,  and  the  opposing  side  has  a 
runner  on  first  and  second,  the  infield  should 
play  back.  Yet  in  the  early  stages  of  the  game 
the  first  and  third  baseman  should  be  prepared 
for  a  bunt. 

With  the  bases  occupied  as  above,  the  infield, 
under  all  conditions  except  when  three  or  more 
ahead,  with  none  out,  should  play  as  follows: 
first-baseman  on  his  base  (ready  to  go  in  for  the 
bunt);  third-baseman  on  the  line  (also  ready  for 
the  bunt);  short-stop  and  second-baseman  back 


TEAM  PLAYS  159 

(but  holding  the  runner  close  to  second).  When 
ONE  IS  OUT,  the  first-baseman  can  move  half-way 
back — the  rest  of  the  infield  all  the  way  back 
(if  speedy  man  is  at  bat,  watch  for  a  bunt).  Two 
out,  first-basernan  goes  all  the  way  back  also. 

Team  Plays — Offense  and  Defense 

The  following  plays,  if  perfected,  will  help  to 
develop  the  team-work  of  a  club.  These  plays 
(and  others  that  can  be  worked  out  with  careful 
study)  should  be  learned  both  offensively  and 
defensively;  that  is,  a  team  should  know  how  to 
play  them  or  prevent  their  being  played. 

The  signs  that  are  used  in  the  following  plays 
are  only  given  as  examples — each  team  should 
decide  upon  its  own  signs. 

(14)  The  play  from  pitcher  to  second  base  to  catch 
the  runner  off  that  base.  This  play  may  be  made 
in  two  ways : 

{a)  Pitcher  stands  on  the  rubber,  looking  at  the 
catcher;  short-stop  or  second-baseman  gives  the 
catcher  a  sign  (such  as  picking  up  dirt  or  rubbing 
the  leg)  and  then  starts  for  the  base;  instantly, 
as  the  short-stop  starts  for  the  base,  the  catcher 
gives  the  pitcher  a  sign  (such  as  rubbing  his  leg 
with  his  hand),  Whereupon  the  pitcher  whirls 
and  throws  to  second  base. 

ib)  The  pitcher  looks  over  his  shoulder  at  his 


i6o  BASEBALL 

short-stop  or  second-baseman,  the  latter  gives 
the  pitcher  a  sign  (such  as  a  nod  of  the  head),  and 
starts  for  second — instantly  the  pitcher  throws 
to  second. 

Both  methods  require  much  practice  before  the 
play  can  be  made  successfully. 

Defense  for  the  above  play.  The  runner  at  second 
should  always  take  a  lead  off  the  base  that  will 
allow  him  time  to  get  back  to  the  base  safely  as 
the  pitcher  turns  to  throw  to  the  base.  Watch 
the  pitcher. 

(15)  Runner  on  second,  none  out ;  a  play  to  put 
the  runner  out  at  third.  When  the  batter  is  ex- 
pected to  make  a  sacrifice  bunt  (see  Play  19),  the 
short-stop  drives  the  runner  back  to  the  base  (by 
running  as  though  to  cover  the  base);  then,  as  the 
runner  goes  back  to  the  base,  the  pitcher  puts  a 
good  ball  over  the  plate  as  batter  bunts.  The 
pitcher  and  first-baseman  run  in,  and,  upon  getting 
the  ball,  throw  to  third.  The  runner  will  have 
been  delayed  long  enough  at  second  to  be  thrown 
out  at  third.  This  is  a  dangerous  play,  there- 
fore it  should  only  be  used  occasionally,  since  the 
batter  may  hit  through  short-stop  if  the  position 
is  open. 

Defense  for  above  play.  The  runner  at  second 
should  never  run  back  to  the  base  unless  the 
pitcher  turns  to  throw  to  the  base;    the  runner 


TEAM  PLAYS  i6i 

should  always  be  leading  toward  third  base  as  the 
pitcher  delivers  the  ball  to  the  batter. 

(i6)  Play  from  catcher  to  pitcher  to  second  base 
to  catch  runner  off  that  base.  This  play  can  be 
worked  when  the  catcher  has  received  the  ball 
from  the  pitcher;  the  pitcher  walks  carelessly 
toward  the  catcher,  who  throws  him  the  ball — 
instantly  as  the  pitcher  gets  the  ball  the  short- 
stop starts  for  the  base  and  the  pitcher  snaps  the 
ball  to  second. 

Defense.  Runner  on  second  always  play  it 
safe.  Return  to  the  base  as  the  pitcher  receives 
the  ball  from  the  catcher,  again  getting  your  lead 
as  the  pitcher  takes  his  position  on  the  rubber 
(his  back  toward  you). 

(17)  Runners  on  first  and  second,  or  first,  second, 
and  third,  A  play  to  get  the  runner  off  first  if  he  is 
taking  a  big  lead.  First-baseman,  if  playing  off 
his  base  behind  runner,  gives  catcher  the  signal 
(such  as  a  slight  twist  of  the  gloved  hand — to 
make  it  safe,  the  catcher  should  return  the  same 
signal  to  the  baseman),  the  catcher  then  calls  for 
a  waste  ball;  as  the  catcher  receives  the  ball  the 
first-baseman  starts  for  the  base,  the  catcher 
throwing  to  first  instantly  upon  receiving  the  ball. 

Defense.  Runner  on  first  should  take  a  lead 
oflF  the  base  of  such  a  distance  that  he  can  get 
back  to  the  base  safely  if  the  catcher  throws — 


i62  BASEBALL 

and  he  should  always  go  back  to  the  base  swiftly 
as  the  catcher  receives  the  ball. 

(i8)  Runner  on  first  (or  first  and  second),  none 
out,  and  the  hatter  is  expected  to  hunt.  (See  Play  19.) 
A  play  to  get  the  runner  of  first.  Second-baseman 
gives  catcher  signal  (catcher  returns  same), 
catcher  calls  for  a  waste  ball;  as  pitcher  delivers 
the  ball,  the  first-baseman  leaves  his  base  and 
runs  toward  the  batter  (evidently  to  field  the 
bunt),  at  the  same  time  the  second-baseman  runs 
to  first  to  take  the  ball  from  the  catcher  who 
throws  upon  catching  the  ball.  The  same  play 
may  be  made  in  which  the  first-baseman  either 
merely  feints  to  go  in  for  the  bunt — or  remains 
on  his  base,  receiving  the  ball  himself  from  the 
catcher. 

Defense.     Same  as  on  the  above  play. 

When  to  Bunt  to  Advance  Base-Runners 

(19)  Unless  otherwise  stated,  the  following  di- 
rections hold  good  in  all  baseball. 

{a)  Runner  on  first  hase,  none  out,  one  run  needed 
to  win.  During  the  last  two  or  three  innings, 
bunt.  (Weak  hitters  should  bunt  even  in  the 
early  part  of  the  game.) 

Reason:  to  avoid  the  double  play  and  to  put 
the  runner  on  second  base,  where  he  can  be 
scored  by  a  single  (one-base  hit). 


TEAM   PLAYS  163 

In  amateur  baseball,  it  is  advisable  to  bunt 
at  all  stages  of  the  game  in  the  above  circum- 
stances. 

{h)  Runner  on  first  base,  none  out,  two  runs  he- 
hind.  In  amateur  baseball,  during  the  first  four 
or  five  innings,  bunt. 

Reason:  to  avoid  double  plays,  trying  for  one 
run  inning  after  inning. 

ic)  Runner  on  first  base,  none  out,  when  ahead, 
hit.  In  amateur  baseball,  unless  away  ahead — 
continue  to  bunt,  constantly  trying  for  one  more 
run. 

{d)  Runner  on  second  base,  none  out,  one  run 
needed  to  tie  the  score  or  win.  Unless  the  batsman 
is  a  good  hitter,  always  bunt. 

Reason:  to  advance  the  base-runner  to  third 
base,  where,  with  the  infield  in,  he  will  have  six 
chances  to  score.  The  chances  to  score  would 
occur  in  any  of  the  following  cases:  a  fly  ball,  a 
base-hit,  an  error,  a  passed  ball,  a  wild  pitch,  or 
the  squeeze  play. 

Defense.  The  pitcher,  unless  the  batter  is  a 
good  hitter,  could  attempt  Play  No.  15. 

{e)  Runner  on  second,  none  out.  Amateur  teams 
should  bunt  even  when  one  or  two  runs  ahead. 

(/)  Runners  on  first  and  second,  none  out,  one 
run  needed  to  tie  the  score  or  win.  Bunt  at  all 
stages  of  the  game. 


i64  BASEBALL 

(g)  Runners  on  first  and  second,  none  out,  two 
runs  behind.     Bunt. 

Reason:  to  get  runners  on  second  and  third 
bases,  with  two  chances  to  score  both  on  a  base- 
hit. 

(J%)  Runners  on  first  and  second,  none  out.  If 
one  or  two  runs  ahead,  and  the  batter  is  a  poor 
hitter  or  slow  runner,  he  should  hunt  (otherwise 
hit). 

{i)  Runners  on  first  and  second,  one  out,  one  or 
two  runs  needed.  It  may  seem  peculiar  to  advise 
bunting  under  these  circumstances,  but  if  the 
pitcher  is  at  bat  and  is  a  poor  hitter,  he  might  as 
well  deliberately  sacrifice  himself  to  put  men  on 
second  and  third,  instead  of  running  the  risk  of 
hitting  into  a  double  play. 

(20)  When  a  player  is  fielding  his  position 
according  to  the  battery  signals  (given  to  the 
pitcher  by  the  catcher),  he  must  not  move  pre- 
maturely. The  batter,  seeing  him  shift,  would 
probably  know  what  ball  to  expect.  (Batters 
should  note  any  change  of  position  on  the  part 
of  the  fielders  before  the  pitcher  delivers  the 
ball.) 

(21)  The  push  or  drag  hit.  This  play  is  accom- 
plished when  the  short-stop  and  second-baseman 
are  playing  back.  The  batsman  taps  the  ball 
just  hard  enough  to  get  it  past  the  pitcher  on 


TEAM  PLAYS  165 

either  side.  A  fast  man,  especially  a  left-handed 
batter,  can  frequently  beat  the  ball  to  first  base 
on  this  play.  This  play  may  be  used  in  connec- 
tion with  Play  No.  22. 

Defense.  The  short-stop,  and  especially  the 
second-baseman,  can  in  a  measure  prevent  this 
play  from  succeeding  by  playing  a  Httle  closer 
to  the  base-line  when  batters  who  have  made  this 
play  successfully  are  hitting.  A  close  watch  over 
the  batter's  motions  will  also  enable  the  fielder 
to  anticipate  this  play,  since  the  batter  in  attempt- 
ing it  will  not  take  his  usual  swing  at  the  ball. 

(22)  The  hit-and-run  play,  (a)  In  this  play 
the  batter  hits  the  ball  while  the  base-runner  is 
stealing  a  base,  either  from  first  to  second  or 
from  second  to  third.  By  prearranged  signal,  the 
runner  starts  for  the  next  base  as  the  pitcher  de- 
Hvers  the  ball  to  the  batter;  and  the  batter  makes 
an  effort  to  hit  the  ball.  Here  the  batter  should 
not  swing  hard  at  the  ball;  he  should  concentrate 
his  attention  upon  meeting  the  ball  and  driving 
it,  if  possible,  behind  the  runner,  thus  reducir/g 
the  opportunity  of  the  opponents  making  a 
double  play.  In  order  to  make  this  play  suc- 
cessfully, it  is  necessary  for  the  batter  to  have 
the  ball  thrown  within  hittable  distance  of  the 
plate;  therefore  the  batter  should  attempt  the 
play  only  when  he  expects  a  good  ball. 


1 66  BASEBALL 

The  signals  in  this  play  may  be  given  either  by 
the  batsman  or  the  base-runner;  or  the  play  may 
be  made  without  any  signals — the  batsman  hit- 
ting the  ball  as  he  sees  the  runner  steaHng.  The 
hit-and-run  play  is  a  good  one  when  used  by 
reasonably  sure  hitters.  It  frequently  enables 
the  base-runner,  because  of  his  running  start,  to 
go  an  extra  base  on  a  hit  and,  for  the  same  rea- 
son, makes  difficult  the  execution  of  a  double 
play. 

Defense,  The  only  possible  defense  against  the 
hit-and-run  play  is  to  have  the  pitcher  hold  the 
runner  close  to  the  base,  and  the  catcher  try  to 
diagnose  the  play,  calling  for  the  waste  ball  when 
he  thinks  the  play  is  coming.  The  waste  ball 
will  prevent  the  batter  from  hitting  the  ball, 
thereby  enabling  the  catcher  to  throw  to  the  base 
to  catch  the  runner.  Here  it  is  a  battle  of  wits 
between  the  pitcher  and  the  opposing  batsman 
and  base-runner. 

{h)  Another  method  of  putting  the  hit-and-run 
play  into  effect  is  the  following:  As  the  runner  on 
first  starts  for  second,  the  batsman  bunts  the 
ball  toward  the  third-baseman.  This  compels 
the  third-baseman  to  leave  his  base  and  come  in 
after  the  ball,  and,  if  the  runner  on  first  is  fast, 
he  can  frequently  go  to  third  base  while  the 
third-baseman  is  playing  the  ball  to  first. 


TEAM  PLAYS  167 

(c)  The  hit-and-run  play  may  be  made  by 
using  the  push  or  drag  hit  in  the  following  way: 
As  the  runner  on  first  steals,  the  batter  bunts  or 
pushes  the  ball  past  the  pitcher  on  the  short-stop 
side.  Then,  if  the  short-stop  is  covering  second 
base  (seeing  the  man  steal),  it  will  be  difficult  to 
retire  either  the  base-runner  or  the  batsman. 


X 


HiT-AND-RuN  Signals 

Following  are  a  few  suggestive  systems  of  sig- 
nals that  may  be  used  in  the  hit-and-run  play, 
preferably  given  by  the  batter.  (Each  team, 
however,  should  adopt  a  system  of  its  own.)  The 
batter  should  give  the  signal  to  his  base-runner 
at  a  time  when  he  knows  the  runner  can  watch 
him;  for  instance,  when  the  runner  is  returning 
to  his  base,  after  making  a  safe  hit,  or  when 
the  ball  goes  into  the  catcher's  hands.  When 
the  runner  sees  the  signal,  he  steals  on  the  next 
ball  pitched,  knowing  that  batter  will  endeavor 
to  hit  it. 

(a)  The  batter  wipes  his  hand  in  some  partic- 
ular way  on  some  particular  place  on  his  uni- 
form. 

(b)  The  batter  opens  and  closes  either  hand  as 
he  holds  the  bat. 

(c)  Some  natural  movement  of  either  foot. 

(d)  Wiping  the  trousers  with  the  hand  may  be 


i68  BASEBALL 

used  as  the  hit-and-run  signal,  when  the  bat  is 
held  in  some  particular  position. 

ie)  The  base-runner  can  select  the  signal  to  be 
used  by  the  batter.  For  instance,  as  the  base- 
runner  returns  to  his  base,  he  can  make  a  series 
of  natural  motions,  any  one  of  which  (by  p re- 
arrangement) can  be  selected  as  the  signal. 
For  illustration,  suppose  that  it  is  agreed  that  the 
second  motion  made  by  the  base-runner  be  used 
as  the  signal.  Then  as  the  runner  returns  to  the 
base  he  adjusts  his  hat,  then  pulls  up  his  trou- 
sers, and  then  rubs  his  chin.  At  once  the  batter 
will  know  that  when  he  wants  to  signal  for  the 
hit-and-run,  he  must  pull  up  his  trousers.  The 
base-runners,  of  course,  should  vary  these  motions 
each  time  they  are  on  base;  and  the  batter  should 
watch  closely. 

The  above  sets  of  signals  (or  signals  similar  to 

them)  may  be  adopted  by  the  club  as  a  whole; 

^  or  individual  batters  may  have  separate  sets  of 

signals  to  be  used  with  the  preceding  batter  and 

the  one  following. 

(23)  The  squeeze  play.  This  play  consists  in 
the  batter  bunting  the  ball  while  the  runner  on 
third  base  is  on  his  way  home.  By  a  prear- 
ranged signal  (generally  given  by  the  batter)  the 
runner  starts  for  home  just  as  the  pitcher  be- 
gins the  forward  part  of  his  motion  to  deliver 


TEAM   PLAYS  169 

the  ball  to  the  batter,  then  the  batter  bunts  the 
ball. 

The  success  of  the  play  depends  both  upon  the 
runner  and  the  batter.  If  the  runner  starts  too 
soon,  giving  the  pitcher  time  to  diagnose  the  play 
and  throw  the  ball  accordingly,  there  is  little 
chance  of  the  batter  being  able  to  bunt.  But  if 
the  runner  starts  at  the  right  time,  the  pitcher 
will  have  gone  too  far  in  his  motion  of  delivering 
the  ball  to  throw  it  out  of  the  batter's  reach. 
The  batter  should  be  intent  only  upon  bunting 
the  ball.  If  he  has  in  mind  the  idea  of  reaching 
first  base  safely,  he  will  generally  fail  to  bunt  the 
ball.  Therefore  he  should  never  mind  himself, 
but  look  only  to  making  the  bunt. 

The  reason  this  play  is  not  used  more  is  that  the 
players  cannot  bunt  and  will  not  learn  to  bunt. 

If  there  are  runners  on  second  and  third  as  the 
squeeze  play  is  made,  the  runner  on  second,  since 
he  too  sees  the  squeeze-play  signal,  can  get  a 
running  start  on  the  pitcher's  motion  and,  if  the 
ball  is  bunted  toward  the  third-baseman,  can 
score  as  the  ball  is  being  thrown  to  first.  But 
if  the  ball  is  played  home,  and  the  man  going 
home  sees  that  he  is  clearly  out,  he  should  stop 
and  run  up  and  down  the  line,  allowing  the  batter 
time  to  go  to  second. 

Defense,  The  only  method  of  breaking  up  the 
squeeze  play  is  for  the  pitcher  to  use  a  slow  wind- 


I70  BASEBALL 

up  motion,  all  the  while  watching  the  runner  on 
third  base.  He  will  often  start  home  before  the 
pitcher  has  delivered  the  ball,  in  which  case 
the  pitcher  should  throw  the  ball  signalled  by  the 
catcher;  if  the  curve  ball  is  called  it  should  be 
thrown  wide  and  low,  out  of  the  batter's  reach; 
and  if  the  fast  ball  is  called  it  should  be  thrown 
high  and  wide  or  in  line  with  the  batter's  head. 
The  pitcher,  if  the  man  is  going  home,  should 
always  throw  the  ball  called  for  by  his  catcher, 
otherwise  the  catcher  is  liable  to  miss  the  ball 
entirely.  For  instance,  if  the  catcher  has  called 
for  a  curve,  he  will  be  ready  to  handle  its  sharp 
break;  and  if  the  pitcher  were  to  throw  a  fast 
ball,  the  catcher  would  be  deceived,  and  prob- 
ably unable  to  handle  it,  especially  if  it  came 
high. 

Squeeze-play  signals.  Some  teams  use  the  same 
signal  for  the  squeeze  play  and  the  hit-and-run 
play.  For  instance,  if  there  is  a  runner  on  third 
base  and  one  on  first,  the  hit-and-run  signal  always 
calls  for  a  squeeze  play. 

Other  teams,  especially  those  that  seldom  use 
the  squeeze  play,  have  a  separate  signal  for  the 
squeeze  play  and  one  for  the  hit-and-run.  Then, 
with  runners  on  first  and  third,  the  hit-and-run 
signal  applies  only  to  the  runner  on  first  base, 
while  the  squeeze-play  signal  works  with  the 
runner  on  third. 


TEAM  PLAYS  171 

The  squeeze-play  signals  may  be  of  the  same 
general  nature  as  those  used  in  the  hit-and-run 
play. 

(24)  The  delayed  steal.  This  play  can  be  made 
successfully  only  against  a  catcher  who  works 
automatically,  that  is,  who  catches  and  returns 
the  ball  to  the  pitcher  without  watching  the 
runner. 

The  runner  on  first  base  takes  a  good  lead  off 
the  base,  but  does  not  start  for  second  until  the 
catcher  has  the  ball;  then,  just  as  the  catcher  is 
making  his  motion  of  returning  the  ball  to  the 
pitcher,  but  before  the  ball  has  left  the  catcher's 
hand,  the  runner  starts  for  second.  The  catcher 
must  then  draw  his  arm  back  again,  making  a 
full  swing  before  throwing,  and  this  delay  is  what 
helps  the  runner  to  beat  the  ball  to  second  base. 

Defense.  When  there  is  a  runner  on  first  base, 
the  catcher  should  glance  at  him  before  beginning 
the  forward  motion  of  his  arm  in  returning  the 
ball  to  the  pitcher.  This  action  will  assist  the 
catcher  in  preventing  the  runner  from  making 
the  delayed  steal. 

(25)  When  you  are  two  or  more  runs  ahead, 
do  not  take  difficult  chances  of  retiring  runners 
occupying  bases.  For  instance,  with  first  base 
occupied,  if  the  ball  is  hit  to  the  first-baseman, 
he  should  not  try  for  the  double  play  unless  the 
chances  of  making  it  are  all  in  his  favor.     Other- 


172  BASEBALL 

wise  he  may  lose  the  decision  at  second  if  the 
play  be  close;  or  in  throwing  to  second  he  might 
hit  the  runner  with  the  ball,  making  both  men 
safe.  Rather  than  take  these  chances,  retire  the 
batter  at  first  base;  there  will  then  be  one  out,  and 
a  man  on  second,  requiring  a  base-hit  to  score  him. 

(26)  When  the  pitcher  is  using  the  "moist 
ball,"  the  infielders,  upon  handling  cleanly  a  hard 
hit  ball,  should  rub  the  ball  quickly  in  their  hands 
before  throwing.  This  action  will  dry  the  ball, 
thus  eliminating  the  possibility  of  a  bad  throw. 

(27)  In  the  last  inning  (one  out),  with  the 
winning  run  on  third  base,  instead  of  trying  to 
shut  the  run  off  at  home,  the  infield  can  play  in, 
while  the  pitcher  deliberately  gives  the  next  two 
batters  bases  on  balls.  Then  with  three  men  on 
base  the  infield  can  go  back  and  try  for  a  double 
play,  retiring  the  side.  The  reason  for  the  infield 
playing  in  until  the  bases  are  all  occupied  by  run- 
ners is  to  protect  themselves  in  case  the  batter 
should  be  able  to  hit  the  ball.  The  pitcher  should 
deHberately  fill  the  bases,  because  his  infield,  by 
playing  in,  has  increased  infinitely  the  batter's 
chances  of  hitting  safely.  One  run  will  win  the 
game  anyway,  and  the  runner  that  will  make  it  is 
on  third  base  to  start  with;  now,  by  putting  three 
men  on  bases  and  then  playing  back,  the  team 
has  increased  to  the  maximum  the  possibilities  of 
preventing  a  hit  being  made — and  of  retiring  the 


TEAM  PLAYS  173 

side  by  a  double  play.  This  play  is  especially 
advisable  when  it  will  walk  two  good  hitters  and 
bring  up  a  weak  one. 

(28)  When,  with  the  infield  playing  in  to  shut 
off  the  run  at  home,  the  ball  is  hit  sharply  and 
thrown  home,  catching  the  runner  between  home 
and  third,  the  third-baseman  should  move  toward 
home-base,  thus  making  it  possible  to  retire  the 
runner  without  loss  of  time.  The  short-stop 
should  cover  third  base.  The  play  is  made  in 
this  way  to  prevent  the  man  from  running  up  and 
down  the  whole  base-line,  thus  gaining  time  for 
the  batter  in  which  to  advance. 

(29)  Battery  signs.  Many  college  teams  and 
semiprofessional  clubs  think  that  the  more  signs 
they  have  and  the  more  complicated  these  signs 
are,  the  more  proficient  they  are  as  teams,  i.  e.y 
they  think  they  should  have  a  sign  for  the  fast 
ball,  a  sign  for  what  they  call  the  "in-shoot,"  one 
for  the  out-curve,  one  for  the  drop-curve,  as  well 
as  signs  for  the  moist  ball  and  slow  ball.  Now, 
some  of  these  signs  are  unnecessary  and  only 
tend  to  complicate  matters;  the  fewer  the  signs, 
the  less  the  possibility  of  confusion. 

One  sign  is  all  that  is  necessary  for  the  fast 
ball,  whether  it  goes  perfectly  straight  or  tends 
to  shoot.  In  fact,  most  fast  balls  tend  to  shoot  a 
little  in  one  direction  or  another,  and  the  catcher 
is  always  ready  for  them.     And  one  sign  will  do 


174  BASEBALL 

for  curve  balls,  that  is,  the  out-curve,  the  drop- 
curve,  and  the  out-drop.  These  curves  are 
readily  followed  by  the  catcher;  he  need  only 
know  that  one  of  them  is  coming  to  be  able  to 
catch  any  of  them.  It  is  absolutely  necessary 
to  have  a  separate  and  distinct  sign  for  the  moist 
ball,  since  that  is  the  most  puzzHng  ball  for  the 
catcher  to  handle.  The  pitcher  can  throw  a  slow 
ball  without  any  sign.  (But  with  an  inexperi- 
enced pitcher  it  is  sometimes  necessary  for  the 
catcher  to  have  a  slow-ball  sign;  then  the  catcher, 
at  his  own  discretion,  can  call  the  slow  ball  when 
the  pitcher  forgets  to  use  it.)  Another  sign 
which  the  battery  must  use  is  that  telling  the 
pitcher  to  keep  the  ball  out  of  the  batter's  reach; 
that  is  called  the  "waste-ball"  or  "pitch-out" 
sign.  This  ball  should  be  fast  and  thrown  two 
or  three  feet  outside  of  the  plate,  and  at  the 
height  of  the  catcher's  head  as  he  stands  up. 
This  ball  is  called  for  when  the  catcher  calculates 
that  a  base-runner  is  going  to  steal,  or  when  the 
catcher  thinks  that  he  has  an  opportunity  to 
catch  a  runner  off  the  base  (napping).  It  is 
absolutely  necessary  to  keep  this  ball  out  of  the 
batter's  reach,  for  if  he  should  hit  the  ball  while 
a  man  is  stealing  or  a  baseman  is  about  to  play 
a  runner  at  his  base,  the  infielders  will  be  leav- 
ing their  positions  open,  and  the  ball  is  likely  to 
be  hit  through  them. 


TEAM  PLAYS  175 

The  following  are  sets  of  signals  that  may  be 
used  by  batteries  (pitcher  and  catcher).  These 
signals  are  given  merely  to  suggest  systems  that 
may  be  used.  Each  team  should  work  out  and 
adopt  its  own  signals.  They  are  given  prefer- 
ably by  the  catcher  who,  facing  the  pitcher,  as- 
sumes behind  the  plate  a  squatting  position  with 
knees  sHghtly  spread  apart. 

(a)  Place  the  ungloved  (bare)  hand  on  the  in- 
side of  the  leg  close  to  the  body  so  that  when  the 
fingers  are  extended  downward  they  will  be 
visible  only  to  players  who  are  directly  in  front, 
i.  e.,  the  pitcher,  short-stop,  and  second-baseman. 
Then  lay  the  glove  flat  in  your  lap,  covering  your 
bare  hand. 

One  finger  extended Fast  ball 

Two  fingers  extended Curve  ball 

One  finger  wriggled Moist  ball 

Two  fingers  wriggled Slow  ball 

Closed  fist Waste  ball  (pitch-out) 

(b)  Place  the  open  hand  flat  against  your  leg, 
close  to  body,  covering  with  the  glove  as  above. 

Open  hand  flat  against  leg Fast  ball. 

Projecting  thumb Curve  ball. 

Closed  fist Moist  ball. 

Projecting  thumb  wriggled Slow  ball. 

Either  hand  on  your  knee  as  you  rise 

from  your  squatting  position Waste  ball. 


176  BASEBALL 

(c)  The  following  is  a  set  of  signals  given  by 
the  eyes.*  Place  the  hands  on  the  mask  so  that 
the  eyes  are  visible  only  to  the  players  in  front: 

Looking  straight  at  the  pitcher Fast  ball. 

Looking  to  either  side Curve  ball. 

Blinking  eyes Slow  ball. 

Right  eye  closed Waste  ball. 

Left  eye  closed Moist  ball. 

When  there  is  a  runner  on  second  base,  the 
catcher  should  give  his  signal  so  that  the  runner 
cannot  see  them  (otherwise  the  runner  can  flash 
them  to  the  batter).  The  signals  may  be  given  to 
the  pitcher  when  the  short-stop  or  second-base- 
man is  engaging  the  attention  of  the  runner.  It 
is  sometimes  advisable  for  the  catcher  to  have  a 
separate  set  of  signals  to  be  used  with  his  pitcher 
when  there  is  a  runner  on  second  base. 

(30)  When  there  is  a  runner  on  second  base 
and  a  base-hit  is  made  to  the  outfield,  the  first- 
baseman  or  the  third-baseman,  as  the  case  may 
be,  can  intercept  the  throw  from  the  outfielder  if 
told  to  do  so  by  the  catcher,  and  can  make  the 
play  at  second,  retiring  the  batter  at  that  base. 
(Here  the  pitcher  should  back  up  home-base.) 
Otherwise  the  ball  is  allowed  to  go  to  the  plate. 

*  Eye  signals,  though  used  by  some  teams,  are  likely  to  involve 
misunderstandings;  therefore,  when  possible,  it  is  advisable  to  use 
the  other  system. 


TEAM  PLAYS  177 

This  ball,  if  intercepted,  should  be  caught  at  a 
point  about  fifty  feet  in  front  of  the  catcher. 

Some  teams  have  the  pitcher  intercept  the  ball 
on  this  play  while  the  first-baseman  backs  up 
home-base.  This,  however,  should  be  left  to  the 
individual  manager  or  captain. 

(31)  The  player  who  is  to  become  the  next 
batsman,  by  taking  his  position  near  home-base, 
can  at  times  give  valuable  assistance  as  a  coacher. 
For  instance,  when,  with  a  runner  on  second  base, 
the  batsman  makes  a  base-hit,  the  next  batsman 
from  his  position  behind  home-plate  is  in  an  ex- 
cellent position  to  judge,  by  the  direction  of  the 
ball  as  it  is  being  thrown  home,  whether  or  not 
to  have  the  runner  score. 

(32)  Word  signals.  Too  much  emphasis  can- 
not be  laid  upon  the  fact  that  the  manager  (or, 
in  amateur  baseball,  the  captain)  should  observe 
very  carefully  and  turn  to  his  own  account,  when 
possible,  everything  that  the  opposing  players  do. 
From  his  position  on  the  coaching  lines  or  on  the 
bench  he  should  be  keen  to  note  and  communicate 
to  his  players  any  line  of  offense  or  defense  that 
may  be  laid  open.  And  in  order  to  do  this,  he 
must  have  a  system  of  word  signals.  For  ex- 
ample, any  remark  to  the  batsman  containing 
the  word  out  would  instruct  him  to  hit  instead  of 
bunt,  and  vice  versa.     ("Hit  it  out."     "No  one 


178  BASEBALL 

out,"  etc.)  Suppose  that  the  manager,  after  he 
had  instructed  the  batsman  to  bunt,  observed 
that  the  third  and  first  basemen  were  playing 
very  close  and  were  coming  in  to  handle  the  bunt; 
then  the  manager  by  use  of  the  word  signal  could 
switch  the  batter  from  bunting  to  hitting.  By 
so  doing  he  would  catch  the  infielders  unawares, 
and  most  likely  get  the  ball  safely  past  them. 
And  again,  suppose  that  the  batter  had  been  in- 
structed to  hit,  and  that  he  had  hit  a  hard  foul 
down  the  third-base  line,  the  third-baseman  cal- 
culating that  he  will  hit  again,  drops  back  of  the 
base-Hne  several  paces,  thereby  increasing  his 
abihty  to  handle  hard-hit  balls.  Here,  the 
watchful  manager,  knowing  his  batter's  speed  and 
his  ability  to  bunt,  and  the  third-baseman's  field- 
ing weaknesses,  etc.,  can  become  effective.  By  the 
use  of  the  word  signal  he  can  instruct  the  batter 
to  bunt.  Then  if  the  bunt  be  laid  down  the  third- 
base  line,  the  chances  are  all  in  favor  of  the  bats- 
man. 

This  system  of  word  signals  may  be  used  with 
base-runners  also,  and,  in  fact,  it  may  be  extended 
to  various  other  departments  of  the  game. 


XI 

HINTS  TO  COLLEGE  PLAYERS 

The  following  suggestions  may  be  of  interest 
and  of  some  value  to  college  players  : 

Have  regular  hours  for  study.  If  these  are  to 
be  at  night  have  them  in  the  early  part  of  the 
evening.  "Think  baseball"  after  you  have  pre- 
pared your  other  lessons.  Do  not  start  your 
study  hour  with  baseball  or  you  might  find  it 
difficult  to  get  your  mind  down  to  your  other 
studies.  As  far  as  is  possible  do  your  studying 
in  the  daytime,  all  kinds  of  artificial  lights  hurt 
the  eyes. 

If  you  are  worrying  over  low  standing  in  any 
subject  or  subjects,  it  may  interfere  in  your 
thinking  and  playing  baseball;  tell  the  coach 
about  it;  he  can  generally  help  you  in  some  way. 

Do  not  become  discouraged  if  you  do  not 
"make"  the  team  as  soon  as  you  thought  you 
would;  keep  working,  drill  yourself  on  your  weak 
points,  make  them  strong  points. 

Get  plenty  of  rest  during  the  baseball  season, 
it  will  help  you  to  get  a  better  drive  to  your 

179 


l8o  BASEBALL 

bat  and  more  "back"  into  your  throws.  If 
other  students  insist  upon  keeping  you  awake, 
"  kick  over  the  traces"  and  make  them  realize  the 
injury  they  are  doing  you. 

Do  not  sulk  if  you  are  not  put  on  the  regular 
team.  If  you  think  you  are  a  better  player  than 
some  other  man,  work  hardy  and  show  your  coach 
that  you  are  better. 

Do  not  rebel  against  learning  new  ways  of 
playing  the  game — generally  a  riper  experience 
than  you  have  had  tells  the  coach  that  what  he 
wants  you  to  do  is  the  best.  The  man  who  won't 
learn  has  to  step  aside  finally  for  the  man  who 
will. 

Never  think  that  the  baseball  team  is  going 
to  pass  your  examinations  for  you.  If  you  are 
good  enough  to  be  on  the  team,  you  owe  it  to  your 
college  to  stay  there,  so  study  regularly  and  hard. 

Respect  the  older  members  of  the  team;  but 
if  you  are  out  for  a  position,  play  your  best,  no 
matter  whom  you  may  have  to  oust. 

Because  your  opponents  come  from  a  larger 
college  than  yours,  do  not  think  that  they  are 
necessarily  better  than  you.  Go  in  to  win ! 
Play  baseball  every  minute ! 

Do  not  hesitate  to  offer  suggestions  to  your 
coach  and  captain,  but  think  these  suggestions 
over  carefully  before  making  them.     If  it  is  some- 


HINTS  TO  COLLEGE  PLAYERS  i8i 

thing  that  they  have  overlooked,  they  will  be  glad 
to  hear  it.  But  be  careful  about  pitting  your 
judgment  against  theirs. 

Drop  any  sHpshod  method  of  playing  which 
you  may  have  learned  in  school.  In  college  you 
will  be  taught  the  best  methods;  learn  them  and, 
on  every  occasion,  think! 

Listen  to  what  the  coach  has  to  say,  no  matter 
whether  it  applies  to  your  position  or  not,  for 
baseball  knowledge  will  come  in  handy.  If  you 
know  all  that  the  other  fellow  knows,  maybe  you 
can  outwit  him  when  the  occasion  arises. 

When  you  are  to  play  on  a  strange  field,  go  out 
on  it  before  the  game  and  look  it  over.  Note  the 
position  of  the  sun,  the  condition  of  the  grounds, 
whether  the  ground  is  lively  or  not;  observe  any 
obstructions,  such  as  fences,  stands,  etc.  Note 
what  kind  of  a  background  you  will  have  to  look 
into;  also  observe  any  unusual  condition  of  the 
wind;  examine  the  base-lines,  to  see  whether  bunts 
will  tend  to  roll  foul  or  safe,  etc. 

Keep  a  note-book  and  put  down  in  it  the 
mistakes  you  have  made,  also  the  mistakes  others 
make;  this  will  help  to  fix  in  your  mind  the  cor- 
rect way  these  plays  should  be  made. 

Learn  the  rules.  Study  them  carefully,  over 
and  over. 

If  there  is  any  particular  point  about  which 


i82  BASEBALL 

you  are  uncertain,  ask  the  coach !  Do  not  go 
along  until  the  play  comes  up  without  knowing 
how  to  handle  it. 

Constant  practice  will  strengthen  you  where 
you  are  weak.  Get  out  on  the  field  early  and 
practise  (such  as  outfielders  handling  ground  balls, 
hitting  a  curved  ball,  or  handling  bunts). 

If  you  have  fallen  off  in  your  batting,  study 
yourself;  have  the  coach  watch  your  motion  at 
bat.  There  is  generally  a  good  reason  for  your 
"losing  your  stride."  It  may  be  that  you  are 
stepping  too  far,  or  hitting  up  at  the  ball,  or  pull- 
ing away,  etc. 

When  you  have  made  a  mistake,  admit  it.  (The 
best  players  make  them.)  But  try  not  to  repeat 
the  same  mistake. 

Do  not  be  ashamed  to  strike  out,  but  do  not 
strike  out  on  called  strikes.  "Hit  them  when 
they  are  over." 

Stop  working  before  you  are  dead  tired.  You 
can't  do  your  best  when  you  are  fagged  out.  Do 
not  bat  too  long  at  a  stretch,  for  your  muscles 
lose  their  freshness  and  you  can't  get  the  neces- 
sary snap  to  your  swing. 

If  you  have  a  sore  arm,  tell  the  coach.  You 
can't  do  yourself  justice  while  working  at  this 
disadvantage. 

While  you  are  at  bat,  a  touch  of  near-sighted- 


HINTS  TO  COLLEGE  PLAYERS  183 

ness  or  far-sightedness  is  frequently  offset  by  a  step 
nearer  to  the  pitcher  or  a  step  away. 

Do  not  crowd  the  plate  if  you  can't  hit  a  close 
ball. 

Keep  away  from  the  score-book.  Play  the  game 
the  best  you  know  how,  and  let  the  averages  take 
care  of  themselves. 

Very  often  weak  wrists  and  arms  (indicated  by 
a  longing  for  a  light  bat)  are  overcome  by  having 
a  bat  handy  to  swing  in  your  room.  Bore  a  hole 
in  the  end  and  insert  a  half  pound  of  iron  in  it. 

Avoid  tobacco.     It  can't  do  you  any  good. 

Remember  that  the  professional  is  better  than 
you  because  he  devotes  his  entire  time  to  thinking 
and  playing  baseball,  while  you  have  your  college 
duties  to  perform  (spending  but  a  Httle  time  over 
ball).  However,  try  to  bring  into  your  baseball 
some  of  that  thinking  ability  which  your  college 
training  is  supposed  to  develop  in  you. 

Your  opportunities  for  studying  your  opponents 
are  infinitely  less  in  college  than  in  professional 
baseball;  therefore,  observe  very  carefully  what 
happens,  and  remember  it.  Note  the  directions 
in  which  the  various  batters  hit,  who  the  fast 
men  are,  etc. 

Do  not  imitate  the  professional's  vocabulary, 
or  his  walk — they  won't  improve  your  game; 
observe  how  he  actually  plays  the  game. 


i84  BASEBALL 

If  your  team  wins,  don't  worry  about  your  per- 
sonal performances. 

Avoid  getting  into  the  habit  of  quarrelling 
with  the  umpire — this  habit  never  avails  you  any- 
thing. If  he  has  made  a  mistake,  he  knows  it; 
your  telling  him  about  it  constantly  may  make 
you  feel  smart,  but  it  won't  help  your  team 
any. 

A  player's  individual  ability  is  often  offset  by 
his  disorganizing  effect  on  the  team.  Beware  of 
dissension. 

Next  to  being  captain  of  the  team,  you  should 
be  a  good  follower. 

Never  be  satisfied  with  your  game,  try  to  im- 
prove. 

Remember  that  as  a  college  man  you  are  sup- 
posed to  be  a  gentleman.  Habits  of  rowdyism 
are  not  tolerated  in  professionaHsm;  college  en- 
vironment should  stamp  them  out  automatically. 

Give  your  opponents  credit  for  a  good  play;  you 
like  to  get  it  when  you  make  a  good  one. 

It  is  a  good  plan  for  the  players  to  chum  to- 
gether when  ofF  the  diamond — this  produces  a 
spirit  of  unity  that  can't  be  obtained  in  any  other 
way. 

Remember  that  when  you  are  chosen  to  play 
on  a  college  team  you  represent  not  only  your 
particular  student  body  but  the  whole  host   of 


HINTS  TO  COLLEGE  PLAYERS  185 

alumni  and  the  friends  and  benefactors  of  the 
college.  Therefore  do  not  perform  one  act  which 
will  prevent  you  from  being  absolutely  at  your 
best — ^worthy  of  the  trust  placed  in  you. 


XII 

HINTS  TO  SPECTATORS 

The  incidents  during  a  baseball  game  that  have 
to  do  with  its  final  outcome  are  many  and 
various.  The  almost  infinite  number  of  possi- 
bilities, either  attempted  or  neglected,  which  offer 
themselves  in  the  nine  innings,  can  scarcely  be 
grasped  even  by  the  most  trained  observer.  But 
many  of  the  important  things  which  affect  the 
offense  and  defense — the  success  or  failure  of  play 
— may  be  recognized  by  the  average  spectator 
when  once  his  attention  has  been  called  to  them. 
A  knowledge  of  those  points  which  are  of  vital 
importance  to  the  players  cannot  fail  of  being 
interesting  to  the  spectator.  It  is  felt,  therefore, 
that  the  following  "hints'*  will  help  the  spectator 
in  placing  proper  significance  upon  the  various 
acts  of  the  players : 

It  will  be  observed  that  a  certain  few  players 
always  coach  at  first  and  third  bases.  These  men 
are  selected  to  do  this  work  because  their  judg- 
ment in  directing  the  base-runners  is  good.  Many 
a  game  has  been  lost  because  the  manager  sent 
the  wrong  player  out  to  coach. 

i86 


HINTS  TO  SPECTATORS  187 

The  direction  and  strength  of  the  wind  are  im- 
portant factors  in  baseball.  Observe  the  players, 
as  they  come  on  the  field,  tossing  bits  of  grass  or 
dust  into  the  air,  or  looking  at  the  flags  to  ascer- 
tain the  direction  of  the  wind. 

Before  the  game  observe  the  constant  practice 
of  receiving  short  taps  from  the  bat..  Four  or 
five  players  in  a  group  in  turn  throw  the  ball  to 
a  single  batter.  This  rapid  handling  of  the  ball 
removes  awkwardness,  and  is  good  training  for 
batting  and  fielding. 

When  certain  players  are  at  bat,  the  outfielders 
may  be  seen  to  shift  their  positions.  For  in- 
stance, if  a  batter  is  known  to  hit  the  ball  reg- 
ularly to  left  field,  the  outfielders  all  move  in  that 
direction;  then  the  pitcher,  by  keeping  the  ball 
well  on  the  first-base  side  of  the  plate,  will  try  to 
make  the  batter  hit  to  right  field — calculating 
that  the  batter  will  not  hit  effectively  in  that  field. 
Some  pitchers,  however,  try  to  make  men  hit  to 
their  favorite  field,  after  placing  the  fielders  in 
that  field. 

Some  men  are  constantly  swinging  two  or  three 
bats.  This  is  done  to  strengthen  the  forearms 
and  wrists.  After  handling  two  or  three  bats, 
one  bat  seems  quite  light  in  the  hands  and  can  be 
swung  more  readily  against  a  speedy  ball. 

Note  the  kind  of  balls  thrown  to  the  batters 


i88  BASEBALL 

in  batting  practice.  If  a  left-handed  pitcher  is 
expected  in  the  game,  practice  will  be  against  a 
left-handed  man,  who  will  try  to  throw  the  same 
kind  of  balls  that  the  opposing  pitcher  will  throw. 

Often  the  runner  on  first  base  will  take  a  big  lead 
off  the  base,  without  intending  to  steal,  merely 
to  worry  the  pitcher,  who  will  keep  throwing  to 
catch  him.  This  is  frequently  done  against 
young  or  inexperienced  pitchers,  compelling  them 
to  lose  their  control. 

"  When  a  runner  is  on  first  base  and  there  are 
two  out,  note  how  many  high,  wide  (waste)  balls 
are  thrown  to  the  batter.  This  is  done  to  enable 
the  catcher  to  throw  readily  to  second  base,  for 
the  runner  will  usually  attempt  to  steal  when 
there  are  two  out. 

A  team  that  is  several  runs  behind  will  seldom 
bunt;  it  usually  tries  to  hit  the  ball  hard,  taking 
the  chance  of  getting  as  many  runs  as  possible, 
instead  of  sacrificing  to  score  one  or  two. 

There  is  usually  one  ball  with  which  a  pitcher 
is  most  successful,  sometimes  it  is  in  combination 
with  another.  It  is  interesting  to  try  to  discover 
wherein  the  pitcher's  success  lies. 

When  a  runner  is  on  first  base,  and  there  are 
none  out,  observe  the  kind  of  balls  thrown  to  the 
batter.  If  the  score  is  at  all  close,  the  pitcher 
generally  expects  the  batter  to  bunt;    therefore. 


HINTS  TO  SPECTATORS  189 

he  usually  keeps  the  ball  high,  in  which  place  it 
is  difficult  to  bunt  successfully. 

A  pitcher  who  "has  the  batter"  two  strikes  and 
no  balls  will  generally  make  him  go  after  a  "bad" 
one.  It  is  interesting  to  note  with  what  kind  of 
a  ball  the  pitcher  tries  to  catch  his  man  napping. 

When  there  are  two  out,  and  three  balls  and  two 
strikes  on  the  batter,  all  base-runners  advance  as 
the  pitcher  makes  his  motion  to  deliver  the  ball 
to  the  batter. 

A  team  that  is  two  or  more  runs  ahead  will 
seldom  play  the  infield  in;  it  is  the  safer  policy 
to  play  back,  allowing  one  run  to  score  if  neces- 
sary, in  order  to  make  a  double  play  or  to  clear  the 
bases. 

When  a  runner  is  on  third  base  (one  or  none  out), 
the  score  being  close,  observe  that  the  infield 
plays  in  to  retire  the  runner  at  home-base.  Many 
teams,  however,  restrict  the  playing  of  their  in- 
field in  to  the  last  part  of  the  game,  being  con- 
tented in  the  early  part  of  the  game  to  keep  the 
score  as  low  as  possible  while  making  every  effort 
to  clean  the  bases  or  retire  the  side  by  a  double  play. 

When  a  runner  is  on  first  base  and  a  hit  is  made 
to  right  field,  note  the  positions  taken  by  the 
short-stop,  left-fielder,  and  the  pitcher.  Since 
the  ball  will  be  fielded,  usually,  to  third  base,  the 
short-stop  should  be  in  direct  line  with  the  ball 


I90  BASEBALL 

and  should,  if  told  to  by  the  third-baseman,  inter- 
cept it  and  throw  to  second  to  head  off  the  run- 
ner there.  (This  is  done  if  the  third-baseman  sees 
that  the  man  going  to  third  cannot  be  caught.) 
The  pitcher  should  be  backing  up  third  base,  as 
also  should  the  left-fielder;  an  overthrow  would 
then  be  handled  and  a  score  prevented. 

It  is  interesting  to  watch  the  situation  where 
there  is  a  runner  on  first  base  and  one  on  third. 
The  team  in  the  field  usually  makes  every  effort 
to  prevent  what  is  known  as  the  "double  steal," 
that  is,  the  runner  on  third  scoring  as  the  runner 
goes  from  first  to  second.  The  pitcher  is  up 
against  the  proposition  of  keeping  the  runners 
close  to  their  bases  to  prevent  their  getting  big 
leads;  he  must  also  cut  down  his  motion  as  much 
as  possible,  and  yet  must  keep  his  control  so  as 
not  to  give  the  batter  a  good  ball  to  hit — the  ball 
must  also  be  one  which  the  catcher  can  readily 
get  off  to  second  base.  The  short-stop  and 
second-baseman  must  be  so  placed  as  to  play  the 
ball  either  home  or  at  second — and  their  actions 
are  generally  dependent  upon  whether  the  batter 
be  a  right  or  left  handed  hitter  and  what  direc- 
tion he  usually  hits  in.  The  catcher  may  throw 
the  ball  to  the  pitcher,  or  to  second  base;  or,  after 
a  feint  to  second,  throw  to  third;  sometimes  throw- 
ing to  third  directly. 


HINTS  TO  SPECTATORS  191 

When  a  runner  is  on  second  base,  and  the  bats- 
man hits  safely  to  the  outfield,  note  where  the 
pitcher  plays;  also  note  what  the  first-baseman 
does.  Usually  the  first  baseman  backs  up  the 
catcher,  while  the  pitcher  places  himself  in  direct 
line  with  the  ball  which  is  being  thrown  home. 
If  told  to  do  so  by  the  catcher,  the  pitcher  will 
intercept  the  ball  and  throw  it  to  second  base, 
attempting  to  catch  the  runner  there.  Some 
teams,  however,  prefer  to  have  the  pitcher  back  up 
home-plate,  while  the  first-baseman  places  him- 
self in  line  with  the  ball  thrown  home. 

Observe  how  the  team  in  the  field  plays  when 
a  runner  on  first  base  attempts  to  steal.  On  some 
teams,  one  man  always  covers  second  base,  and 
the  pitcher  must  use  his  control  accordingly. 
For  instance,  if  it  is  the  second-baseman  who 
covers  the  base,  and  the  man  at  bat  has  a  strong 
tendency  to  hit  between  first  and  second,  the 
pitcher  must  place  the  ball  so  as  to  make  him  hit 
to  the  opposite  side  of  the  diamond;  if  the  bats- 
man hits  right-handed,  the  ball  must  be  kept 
close  to  him;  and  if  he  hits  left-handed,  it  must 
be  kept  on  the  outside  corner  of  the  plate.  On 
other  teams,  the  second-baseman  takes  the  base 
if  the  batsman  is  known  to  hit  to  the  left,  while 
the  short-stop  takes  it  if  the  batsman  hits  to 
the  right.     On  free  hitters  the  short-stop  covers 


192  BASEBALL 

second  on  all  fast  balls;  and  the  second-baseman 
does  so  on  all  curved  balls. 

When  a  runner  is  on  first  base,  and  the  batter 
hits  into  a  double  play,  note  what  the  catcher 
does.  Since  the  ball,  on  this  play,  must  be  han- 
dled with  great  swiftness,  there  is  a  possibility 
of  an  overthrow  at  first,  therefore  the  catcher's 
position  should  be  back  of  first  base.  The  same 
is  true  when,  with  none  on  base,  a  ball  is  hit 
slowly  toward  the  second-baseman. 

Often  one  will  see  players  trying  to  soil  a  new 
ball.  This  is  done  to  take  the  gloss  off  the  cover 
so  that  the  pitcher  can  control  and  curve  the 
ball.  Frequently,  as  the  new  ball  is  batted  into 
the  air,  and  while  the  eyes  of  the  umpires  and 
spectators  are  on  the  ball,  the  pitcher  rubs  his 
hand  in  the  dirt.  He  can  then  remove  the  gloss 
from  the  ball  when  it  is  returned  to  him  (without 
fear  of  penalty  from  the  umpire). 

Observe  that  outfielders  look  away  from  the 
sun  as  much  as  possible,  either  turning  their 
backs  or  looking  down  when  it  is  not  necessary 
for  them  to  watch  the  ball.  This  is  quite  a  nec- 
essary precaution  in  an  especially  sunny  field,  as 
the  strain  on  the  eyes  is  very  severe. 

A  pitcher  never  deliberately  "walks"  the  first 
batter  in  any  inning,  regardless  of  the  score. 

Every  batter  has  his  ** lucky  way"  of  walking 


HINTS  TO  SPECTATORS  193 

up  to  the  plate.  Observe  that  some  always  walk 
in  front,  and  some  behind  the  umpire,  usually  per- 
forming some  regular  act,  such  as  cleaning  the 
dirt  out  of  their  spikes,  wiping  hands  on  the 
ground,  hitting  bat  on  the  plate,  etc. 

When  the  batsman  makes  a  long  hit,  observe 
that  the  basemen  stand  on  their  bases  in  such  a 
way  as  to  make  the  runner  take  the  outside  of  the 
bases,  thereby  delaying  him  considerably. 

When  a  runner  is  on  second  base,  the  short- 
stop usually  runs  him  back  to  the  base,  and  the 
pitcher,  seeing  the  runner  going  back,  delivers  the 
ball  to  the  batter.  This  play  is  made  to  throw 
the  runner  oflF  his  stride;  he  is  going  back  toward 
second  base  as  the  ball  is  pitched,  consequently 
lessening  his  chance  of  scoring  on  a  safe  hit. 

Occasionally,  when  the  above  play  is  made  (if 
there  is  none  out  and  the  batter  is  expected  to 
bunt),  the  pitcher  throws  a  perfect  ball  to  the 
batter,  then  the  first-baseman  and  pitcher  run 
in  to  handle  the  bunt,  which  they  throw  to  third, 
often  catching  the  runner  there  because  he  was 
driven  back  to  second  as  the  ball  was  pitched. 

Passed  balls  and  wild  pitches  are  frequently 
the  result  of  misunderstanding  between  the 
pitcher  and  catcher — of  getting  their  signals 
** crossed."  If  the  catcher  calls  for  one  kind  of 
ball  and  the  pitcher  throws  another,  there  is  apt 


194  BASEBALL 

to  be  trouble,  especially  if  a  low  curve  is  called, 
and  the  pitcher  throws  a  high  fast  ball.  Spec- 
tators can  usually  detect  this  battery  mistake, 
for  the  catcher  squats,  expecting  a  curve,  while 
the  ball  generally  shoots  high  and  wide,  out  of 
his  reach.  A  conference  between  the  pitcher  and 
catcher  usually  follows. 

When  the  pitcher  has  lost  his  control,  some 
player  usually  takes  out  time,  by  adjusting  his 
uniform,  or  holding  a  conference  with  another 
player,  etc. — anything  to  gain  time  during  which 
the  pitcher  can  get  back  his  control  (in  the  mean- 
time the  pitcher  throws  to  the  catcher  or  first- 
baseman).  Frequently  the  captain  will  walk  over 
to  the  pitcher  and  talk  to  him,  trying  to  steady 
him. 

Some  managers  **warm  up"  fresh  pitchers  where 
the  man  who  is  working  can't  see  them,  since 
many  pitchers,  especially  young  ones,  lose  heart 
when  they  see  another  man  ready  to  take  their 
place. 

Note  the  little  tricks  that  are  played  to  give  the 
pitcher  time  to  recover  his  breath  after  he  has 
run  several  bases.  The  following  are  examples: 
The  coacher  pulls  the  batter  away  from  the  plate 
and  whispers  to  him  at  length;  another  man  is 
sent  in  to  run  for  the  pitcher,  but  suddenly  the 
manager  decides  to  let  the  pitcher  run  himself. 


HINTS  TO  SPECTATORS  195 

after  the  lapse  of  a  few  minutes;  if  the  pitcher  is 
about  to  start  an  inning,  after  running  bases,  the 
catcher  throws  the  ball  into  centre  field — anything 
to  delay  the  game. 

Outfielders  should  return  the  ball  to  the 
catcher  so  that  he  receives  it  on  the  first  bound. 
Long  throws  to  third  base  are  made  in  the  same 
way.  This  makes  it  possible  for  another  fielder 
to  intercept  the  ball  if  it  is  necessary;  and  it  also 
gives  the  catcher  or  third-baseman  a  better  oppor- 
tunity to  handle  the  ball. 

A  clever  play  is  sometimes  made  by  a  fast 
runner  on  third  base.  As  the  ball  is  hit  toward 
second  base  the  runner  on  third  gets  a  late  run- 
ning start  from  the  base,  evidently  trying  to 
score.  The  fielder  hurries  the  ball  home,  but  the 
runner  suddenly  pulls  up  and  goes  back  to  third 
base,  thereby  making  the  runner  on  first  and 
himself  safe. 

It  is  interesting  to  note  the  remarkably  fast 
start  toward  second  base  many  runners  get  by 
taking  a  turn  before  reaching  first  base;  that  is, 
they  go  out  of  the  base-line  and  are  headed  for 
second  base  as  they  cross  first. 


DIAGRAMS 


Showing  the  catcher  backing  up  first  base  to  recover  overthrows,  when,  with 
a  runner  on  first,  the  ball  is  hit  to  the  short-stop  or  either  position  in  the  infield, 
and  relayed  from  second  to  first — on  the  double  play.  It  also  shows  the  left 
and  centre  fielders  getting  in  line  with  the  hit  ball  to  recover  it  if  it  gets  by  the 
short-stop.  And  it  shows  the  right-fielder  getting  in  line  with  the  throw  from 
the  short-stop  to  second  base  to  recover  llj.e  ball  if  it  is  thrown  wildly.  On  this 
play,  the  catcher  should  take  a  position  about  thirty  feet  froni  first  base;  he  caa 
then  catch  overthrows,  and  put  out  the  batter,  who  will  be  going  to  second. 


DIAGRAM   II. 


Showing  a  play  being  made  after  a  base-hit  to  the  right-fielder  (with  a  runner 
on  second).  Heavy  lines  show  one  method  of  play;  dotted  lines  (from  pitcher 
and  first-baseman)  show  another.  Ordinarily,  since  the  first-baseman  is  better 
in  handling  thrown  balls,  he  should  take  his  oosition  inside  of  the  diamond  while 
the  pitcher  backs  up  the  catcher.  Many  teams,  nowever,  play  as  inoicated  by 
the  dotted  lines.  In  either  case,  the  second-baseman  covers  first,  and  the  short- 
stop takes  second;  while  the  left-fielder  backs  up  third  base,  and  the  centre- 
fielder  backs  up  second  base.  On  a  hit  to  the  centre-fielder,  these  same  relative 
positions  should  be  taken. 


199 


DIAGRAM  III. 


This  diagram  shows  a  play  being  made  after  a  base-hit  to  left  field  (with  a 
runner  on  second).  The  third-baseman  cuts  into  the  diamond  (as  indicated  by 
the  arrow)  to  be  ready  to  intercept  the  ball  as  it  is  thrown  home.  The  second- 
baseman  covers  second,  short-stop  covers  third.  The  third-baseman  should  in- 
tercept the  ball  and  throw  to  second  if  the  ball  is  going  wide,  especially  if  he  is 
told  to  do  so  by  the  catcher  (in  case  it  is  too  late  to  catch  the  man  at  home).  The 
play  to  second  may  cut  off  the  batsman,  who  will  be  going  there  on  the  throw 
home.    The  centre-fielder  backs  up  second  base,  the  pitcher  backs  up  home-base. 


DIAGRAM  IV. 

Showing  a  play  being  made  after  the  ball  is  hit  past  the  left-fielder.  The 
ball  is  recovered  by  the  left-fielder,  and  thrown  to  the  centre-fielder,  who  has 
got  in  line  with  the  throw  in.  Then  the  centre-fielder  throws  either  to  third 
base  or  home  according  to  the  directions  of  the  short-stop,  who  has  run  out  to- 
ward the  centre-fielder,  and  is  backing  him  up.  The  pitcher  backs  up  third 
base,  the  first-basemen  backs  up  the  catcher,  and  the  second-baseman  covers 
second  base.     The  right-fielder  backs  up  second  base. 

200 


DIAGRAM 


Showing  a  play  being  made  after  the  ball  is  hit  into  deep  left  centre  field. 
The  ball  is  recovered  by  the  centre-fielder,  and  is  thrown  to  the  left-fielder,  who 
takes  a  position  in  line  with  the  home-plate.  The  left-fielder  throws  either  to 
third  base  or  home  according  to  the  directions  of  the  short-stop,  who  is  backing 
up  the  left-fielder.  The  pitcher  backs  up  third  base,  the  first-baseman  backs 
up  home-base,  the  second-baseman  covers  second  base,  and  the  right-fielder  backs 
up  second  base. 


DIAGRAM  VI. 


Showing  a  play  being  made  after  the  ball  is  hit  into  deep  right  centre  field. 
The  centre-fielder  recovers  the  ball  and  throws  it  to  the  right-fielder,  who  is  in 
line  with  the  throw  home.  Then  the  right-fielder  throws  either  to  third  base  or 
home  according  to  directions  from  the  second-baseman,  who  is  backing  up  the 
right-fielder.  The  left-fielder  and  pitcher  back  up  third  base,  and  the  short- 
atop  covers  second  base.    The  first-baseman  backs  up  home-plate. 

201 


DIAGRAM  VII 


Showing  a  play  being  made  after  the  ball  has  been  hit  past  the  right-fielder. 
The  right-fielder  recovers  the  ball,  and  throws  it  to  the  centre-fielder,  who  has 
crossed  over  in  line  with  the  throw  home.  The  centre-fielder  throws  either  to 
third  base  or  home  according  to  the  directions  from  the  second-baseman,  who  is 
backing  up  the  centre-fielder.  The  left-fielder  backs  up  third  base,  pitcher  backs 
up  home,  short-stop  covers  second. 


DIAGRAM  VIII, 


Showing  a  play  being  made  to  retire  a  runner  between  third  base  and  home. 
The  runner  is  on  third  base,  the  ball  is  hit  to  the  second-baseman,  who  throws 
home  and  then  covers  second.  The  runner  starts  for  home  (dotted  line  x  to  x), 
but  stops  when  he  sees  that  he  is  caught  (allowing  the  batter  time  to  go  to  sec- 
ond). The  third-baseman,  to  retire  the  runner  between  third  and  home,  quickly 
follows  the  runner  in,  retiring  him  on  one  throw  from  the  catcher;  then  the  third- 
baseman  throws  to  second  to  retire  the  batsman,  who  will  be  trying  for  that  base. 

202 


2"-»B 


IVB 


DIAGRAM  IX. 
Showing  the  entire  infield  playing  back.  From  these  positions,  the  infielders 
are  enabled  to  cover  the  maxiinum  amount  of  ground  on  all  kinds  of  hit  balls. 
These  positions  should  be  assumed  only  when  it  is  unnecessary  to  play  for  a 
runner  at  home,  or  to  hold  a  runner  close  to  the  base.  For  detailed  directions 
as  to  when  to  take  these  positions,  see  Chapter  X  on  "Team  Plays."  There 
are  occasions,  even  with  a  runner  on  third  base,  when  it  is  advisable  to  assume 
the  above  positions. 


0 

'i 

E 

p 

<^ 

(g) 

0 

> 

r 

DIAGRAM  X. 
Showing  the  entire  infield  playing  in.  In  these  positions  the  infielders  are 
able  to  handle  with  great  rapidity  all  ordinary  balls  hit  directly  at  them,  or 
nearly  so,  and  therefore  can  readily  shut  off  runs  at  the  plate.  Before  assum- 
ing these  positions,  however,  players  should  study  carefully  Chapter  X  on 
"Team  Plays."  The  infielders  should  here  gauge  their  distances  from  the  home- 
plate  by  the  hitting  ability  of  the  batter.  Close  in  on  a  weak  hitter — but  be 
cautious  before  a  slugger. 

203 


DIAGRAM  XI. 

This  diagram  illustrates  roughly  the  advantage  in  covering  ground  which  the 
infielders  have  when  playing  back.  By  playing  inside  of  the  diamond,  the  in- 
fielders  bring  themselves  within  such  close  range  of  the  batter,  that  after  the 
ball  is  hit,  they  have  little  or  no  time  to  move  to  the  right  or  left.  While  by 
playing  well  back  and  outside  of  the  diamond,  they  are  able  to  run  several  paces 
in  either  direction  before  the  ordinary  ball  can  get  by  them.  Of  course,  balls 
hit  on  a  line  between  fielders  go  for  base-hits — no  matter  where  they  play. 


DIAGRAM  XII. 


Showing  a  play  being  made  after  a  hit  to  the  right-fielder  (with  a  runner  on 
first  base).  The  right-fielder  throws  the  ball  to  third  base  to  head  ofi"  the  runner. 
The  short-stop  should  get  in  line  with  the  throw  (about  thirty  feet  from  third 
base),  and  if  the  throw  is  one  which  will  not  catch  the  man  at  third— usually  the 
third-baseman  directs  the  short-stop  here — the  short-stop  should  intercept  the 
ball  and  throw  it  to  second  to  head  the  batter  off  there.  The  pitcher  and  left- 
fielder  back  up  third  base,  the  short-stop  covers  second,  and  the  centre-fielder 
backs  up  second. 


204 


I 


DIAGRAM  XIII. 

A  hit  to  left  field.  The  dotted  line  illustrates  what  is  meant  by  "making 
your  turn  at  first  base."  By  making  your  turn  in  this  manner  you  save  ground 
and  time  in  getting  to  second  should  ball  be  fumbled.  Tliis  is  the  correct  way 
of  runDing  out  base-hits  and  fly-balls. 


DIAGRAM  XIV. 

A  hit  to  left  field.  The  dotted  line  shows  the  incorrect  way  of  running  out  a 
base-hit.  This  illustrates  the  advantage  of  making  your  turn  before  reaching 
first  base,  as  shown  in  Diagram  XIII. 

205 


RETURN         CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 
TO"^-                     198  Main  Stacks 

LOAN  PERIOD  1 
HOME  USE 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS. 

Renewls  and  Recharges  may  be  made  4  days  prior  to  the  due  date. 

Books  may  be  Renewed  by  calling  642-3405. 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 

FEB  1  9  1999 

U.  C.  BERKELEY 

FORM  NO.  DD6 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELEV 
BERKELEY,  CA  94720-600C 


YB   19852 


